OSN 3500 V200R015C20 Product Description 02

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission
System
V200R015C20
Product Description
Issue 02
Date 2017-01-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Product Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 3500 V200R015C20
Intended Audience
This document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application, functions,
hardware and software structure, and features.
The intended audiences of this document are:
l Network Planning Engineer

l Data Configuration Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium

level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
DANGER serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk

which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
WARNING injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,

if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Symbol Description
TIP Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

supplement important points in the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Based on Product Version

V200R015C20
This is the second document issue for the V200R015C20 product version. Compared with 01,
Issue 02 includes the following updates in V200R015C20SPC300:
l Updated the table "Power consumption and weight of each board" in "Quick Reference
of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board" of section "Technical
Specifications."

V200R015C20
This document is the first release of V200R015C20. Compared with the document issue for
the V200R015C10SPC200 product version, this issue has the following updates:
l Added the N1IXCSA, N1HSNS3 boards.
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


V200R015C10
This document is the third release of V200R015C10. Compared with issue 02, this issue
incorporates the following updates in V200R015C10SPC200:
l Optimized section "DCN Management Scheme."

V200R015C10
This document is the second release of V200R015C10. Compared with issue 01, this issue
incorporates the following updates in V200R015C10SPC100:
l Optimized section "Product Networking."

V200R015C10
l Added the N2AT6 board in "Boards."

l Added N2AT6 in "Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each
Board."
l Added the multiplexer group, updating the "PCM" section.

V200R015C00
This document is the second release of V200R015C00. Compared with the document issue
for the V200R015C00 product version, this issue has the following updates:
l Optimized the sections such as "Boards", and "Board REG Function".

V200R015C00
l Added the "Product Specifications" and "Synchronization" sections.
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

l Optimized the sections such as "Equipment Level Protection", "Network Level

Protection", and "Security Management".
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Product Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Product Highlights and Specifications..................................................................................... 1
1.1 Product Highlights.......................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Universal Switch Architecture for Multiservice Grooming........................................................................................ 2
1.1.2 Hierarchical OAM Facilitating Fault Detection.......................................................................................................... 3
1.1.3 TP-Assist Solution Facilitating the O&M of Packet Services.....................................................................................5
1.1.4 Built-In WDM, Flexible Networking.......................................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Product Specifications.................................................................................................................................................. 10
2 Product Networking....................................................................................................................14
3 Products Application.................................................................................................................. 16
3.1 Typical Networking in Packet Mode............................................................................................................................ 17
3.1.1 Typical Networking Without Routers........................................................................................................................17
3.1.2 Hybrid Networking with Routers.............................................................................................................................. 17
3.1.3 Traversing a Third-Party Layer 2 Network............................................................................................................... 19
3.2 Networking with the Packet Domain Overlapping the TDM Domain ........................................................................ 20
3.3 Hybrid Networking with Other Huawei Equipment.....................................................................................................22
3.3.1 Hybrid Networking with the PTN Equipment...........................................................................................................22
3.3.2 Hybrid Networking with the RTN Equipment...........................................................................................................24
4 System Architecture.................................................................................................................... 26
5 Hardware Structure..................................................................................................................... 28
5.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.2 Cabinet..........................................................................................................................................................................29
5.3 Subrack......................................................................................................................................................................... 31
5.3.1 Structure.....................................................................................................................................................................31
5.3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.4 Boards........................................................................................................................................................................... 36
6 Functions and Features in Packet Mode................................................................................. 44

6.1 Capacity........................................................................................................................................................................ 45
6.1.1 Packet Switching Capacity........................................................................................................................................ 45
6.1.2 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode....................................................................................................................... 45
6.2 Services.........................................................................................................................................................................46
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

6.2.1 Service Description....................................................................................................................................................46

6.2.1.1 Service Models....................................................................................................................................................... 46
6.2.1.2 Ethernet Services.................................................................................................................................................... 50
6.2.1.3 CES Services.......................................................................................................................................................... 54
6.2.1.4 ATM/IMA Services................................................................................................................................................ 56
6.2.2 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................................... 58
6.2.3 Service Receiving Capacity.......................................................................................................................................59
6.3 Equipment Level Protection......................................................................................................................................... 59
6.4 Network Level Protection.............................................................................................................................................63
7 Functions and Features in TDM Mode................................................................................... 65

7.1 Capacity........................................................................................................................................................................ 66
7.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Capacity.................................................................................................................................. 66
7.1.2 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode......................................................................................................................... 66
7.2 Services.........................................................................................................................................................................67
7.2.1 Service Types.............................................................................................................................................................67
7.2.2 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................................... 69
7.2.3 Service Receiving Capacity.......................................................................................................................................70
7.3 Equipment Level Protection......................................................................................................................................... 71
7.4 Network Level Protection.............................................................................................................................................76
7.5 Data Features................................................................................................................................................................ 78
7.5.1 Ethernet Features....................................................................................................................................................... 78
7.5.2 RPR Features............................................................................................................................................................. 82
7.5.3 ATM Features............................................................................................................................................................ 83
7.5.4 SAN/Video Features.................................................................................................................................................. 87
7.6 DDN Features............................................................................................................................................................... 90
7.7 PCM Features............................................................................................................................................................... 90
7.7.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................... 91
7.7.2 Application Scenarios-FXS/FXO.............................................................................................................................. 92
7.7.3 Application Scenarios-2- or 4-wire audio and E&M ................................................................................................93
7.7.4 Application Scenarios-Sub-rate................................................................................................................................. 95
7.7.5 Application Scenarios-G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional service....................................................................................96
7.7.6 Application Scenarios-Conference............................................................................................................................ 96
7.7.7 Application Scenarios-Multiplexer Group................................................................................................................ 97
7.8 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................................................105
7.8.1 Background and Advantages................................................................................................................................... 105
7.8.2 Huawei ASON Solution.......................................................................................................................................... 106
7.9 Board REG Function.................................................................................................................................................. 108
8 Synchronization......................................................................................................................... 109
9 Network Management Software............................................................................................ 112
9.1 Network Management Software................................................................................................................................. 113
9.2 DCN Management Scheme........................................................................................................................................ 113
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

9.2.1 Outband DCN.......................................................................................................................................................... 113

9.2.2 Inband DCN.............................................................................................................................................................115
10 OAM...........................................................................................................................................116
10.1 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces.................................................................................................................. 117
10.2 Alarm and Performance Management...................................................................................................................... 117
10.3 ALS Function And Optical Power Management......................................................................................................118
10.4 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance............................................................................................................ 119
10.5 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade...........................................................................................................121
10.5.1 Board Version Replacement.................................................................................................................................. 121
10.5.2 Simulation Package Loading and Package Diffusion............................................................................................121
10.5.3 Hot Patch............................................................................................................................................................... 122
10.5.4 Smooth Upgrade.................................................................................................................................................... 123
10.6 License Management................................................................................................................................................ 123
11 Security Management............................................................................................................. 124

12 Energy Saving and Environment Protection...................................................................... 127
12.1 Energy Saving...........................................................................................................................................................128
12.2 Environment Protection............................................................................................................................................ 128
13 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................130
13.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment..................................................................................................................131
13.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet................................................................................................................................. 131
13.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack................................................................................................................................ 132
13.1.3 Power Supply Parameters...................................................................................................................................... 134
13.1.4 Packet System Performance.................................................................................................................................. 135
13.1.5 Timing and Synchronization Performance............................................................................................................ 141
13.1.6 TDM Transmission Performance...........................................................................................................................142
13.1.7 Laser Safety Class................................................................................................................................................. 143
13.1.8 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............................................................................................................................143
13.1.9 Environmental Specification................................................................................................................................. 144
13.2 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board......................................................................145
13.3 Safety Certification...................................................................................................................................................156
13.4 Environmental Conditions........................................................................................................................................ 157
13.4.1 Environment for Storage....................................................................................................................................... 157
13.4.2 Environment for Transportation............................................................................................................................ 159
13.4.3 Environment for Operation....................................................................................................................................161
14 Complied Standards............................................................................................................... 165

14.1 ITU-T Recommendations......................................................................................................................................... 166
14.2 IEEE Standards.........................................................................................................................................................171
14.3 IETF Standards......................................................................................................................................................... 172
14.4 ANSI Standards........................................................................................................................................................ 176
14.5 Environment Related Standards............................................................................................................................... 176
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

14.6 EMC Standards.........................................................................................................................................................177

14.7 Safety Compliance Standards................................................................................................................................... 178
14.8 Protection Standards................................................................................................................................................. 179
14.9 Packet Standards.......................................................................................................................................................179
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................186
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Product Description 1 Product Highlights and Specifications
1 Product Highlights and Specifications
About This Chapter
This topic describes the highlights and specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.
1.1 Product Highlights

This section describes the features of the OptiX OSN equipment in the aspects of system
architecture, networking, and technologies.
1.2 Product Specifications
This section describes the appearances and specifications of OptiX OSN equipment.
Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Product Highlights

This section describes the features of the OptiX OSN equipment in the aspects of system
architecture, networking, and technologies.
1.1.1 Universal Switch Architecture for Multiservice Grooming

OptiX OSN equipment uses a universal switch architecture for unified grooming of packet
services and TDM services. OptiX OSN equipment can work in packet mode, TDM mode, or
dual-domain (packet+TDM) mode.
The three modes can be smoothly switched by upgrading the software of a service board so
carriers' requirements on services and networks can be met. The smooth switching between
the three modes supports carriers' distributed smooth investment based on the development of
the technology and industrial chain.
Based on a universal switch architecture, OptiX OSN equipment uses the packet transmission
technology to perform efficient statistical multiplexing on data services so the transmission
cost of every bit is reduced. In addition, OptiX OSN equipment uses the Native technology to
transmit TDM services so voice services are transmitted with high quality.
Figure 1-1 shows the OptiX OSN equipment architecture.
Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN equipment architecture
Based on a universal switch architecture, OptiX OSN equipment uniformly transmits packet
services such as 2G, 3G, and VIP private line services so network overlapping is avoided. In
addition, OptiX OSN equipment transmits TDM services. Carriers can constitute an end-to-
end packet network, dual-domain (packet+SDH) network, or hybrid (MSTP+routers) network

that bears L2+L3 services. This complete packet transmission solution allows an evolution
from TDM networks to all-IP networks.
1.1.2 Hierarchical OAM Facilitating Fault Detection

The Hybrid MSTP equipment supports hierarchical OAM to rapidly detect and locate various
faults, thereby improving network reliability. In addition, the Hybrid MSTP equipment
supports distributed OAM and centralized OAM.
Application of Hierarchical OAM

As shown in Figure 1-2, MPLS OAM, MPLS-TP OAM, and ETH OAM constitute
hierarchical OAM at the tunnel layer, PW layer, and Ethernet layer.
Figure 1-2 Application of hierarchical OAM
CE: Customer Edge MEP: Maintenance End Point

MIP: Maintenance Intermediate Point P: Provider
PE: Provider Edge -
Table 1-1 provides various levels of OAM and their functions.

Table 1-1 Various levels of OAM and their functions

Category Level Function
ETH OAM Ethernet Port OAM Ethernet port OAM (EFM) helps maintain point-to-
point Ethernet links between two directly-connected
devices, and it is not service-specific. Ethernet port
OAM provides the following functions:
l OAM auto-discovery
l Link performance monitoring
l Fault detection
l Remote loopback
l Self-loop detection
Ethernet service Ethernet service OAM (CFM) helps maintain end-

OAM to-end Ethernet services. It specifies maintenance
domains (MDs), maintenance associations (MAs),
and maintenance points (MPs), allowing service
flows to be managed by section and by layer.
Ethernet service OAM provides the following
functions:
l Continuity check (CC)
l Loopback (LB) test
l Link trace (LT) test
l Performance check
MPLS MPLS tunnel/PW MPLS tunnel/PW OAM detects, identifies, and

OAM OAM locates defects or faults on MPLS tunnels/PWs on an
MPLS network. Once a fault is detected, protection
switching is triggered. MPLS tunnel/PW OAM
provides the following functions:
l Packet detection
l Ping
l Traceroute

Category Level Function
MPLS-TP MPLS-TP MPLS-TP OAM detects, identifies, and locates

OAM Tunnel/PW OAM faults on a packet network. Once a fault is detected,
protection switching is triggered for improving
network reliability. MPLS-TP OAM provides the
following functions:
l Active mode:
– CC
– Remote fault indication (RDI)
– Alarm indication signal (AIS)
– Client Signal Fail (CSF, only supported by
PWs)
l On-demand mode:
– LB test
– LT test
– Packet loss measurement (only single-ended
LM)
– Delay measurement (1DM and 2DM)
– Lockup of bidirectional tunnels and PWs
– TST test, including diagnostic test and
throughput test
Distributed OAM and Centralized OAM

OAM is categorized into distributed OAM and centralized OAM.
l Distributed OAM: OAM messages are extracted and processed on service processing
boards.
l Centralized OAM: OAM messages are extracted from service processing boards and
then sent to a cross-connect board for centralized processing.
MPLS OAM can be distributed or centralized. MPLS-TP OAM can only be centralized.
Before switching MPLS OAM to MPLS-TP OAM, ensure that MPLS OAM is centralized.
1.1.3 TP-Assist Solution Facilitating the O&M of Packet Services

Like the SDH equipment, Huawei Hybrid MSTP equipment supports a hierarchical operating
& maintenance (O&M) system by using the TP-Assist solution, so packet services can be
configured, commissioned, or maintained in an end-to-end manner.

Figure 1-3 TP-Assist O&M system
TP-Assist O&M system
Service Service Routine

Network planning Fault diagnosis
configuration commissioning maintenance
Professional E2E service One-click Performance Intelligent fault

planning service deployment service monitoring and diagnosis
and planning connectivity test measurement
tools Automatic alarm
deployment with One-click Visualized O&M IP ping
service service
deployment performance
Service loop
test
detection
Tool-free
automatic test
Table 1-2 Functions of the TP-Assist O&M system

Function Description License Purpose Function
Control Difference
Between
Versions
Professional planning service Experienced planning expert – Improves None

and planning tools teams provide professional planning
planning service. efficiency.
Planning tool UniSTAR Improves
Designer, embedded with the planning
common network HLD/LLD accuracy.
design templates and device/
board/interface capacity
parameter templates, is used.
This tool is applicable to
various network planning
scenarios including new
network construction,
network expansion, network
migration, and service
adjustment.


Control Difference
Between
Versions
End-to-end service Deploys Native Ethernet (E- None Quick service None
deployment Line and E-LAN) services configuration
and hybrid services in an end- Improves
to-end manner. configuration
Deploys CES and ATM/IMA accuracy.
services in an end-to-end
manner.
Deploys PW-carried E-Line,
E-LAN, and hybrid services
in an end-to-end manner.
Deploys services across
microwave and optical fibers
in an end-to-end manner.
Automatic deployment of Deploying ETH OAM or None Avoids extra None

alarm management with MPLS-TP OAM when OAM
service deployment deploying Ethernet services deployment
and MPLS tunnels in an end- operations.
to-end manner. Allows the
NE to
automatically
report alarms
when a
service fault
occurs.
One-click service Supports one-click service None Quick None

connectivity test connectivity test for Ethernet commissioni
services and MPLS tunnels ng
that are deployed in an end- Lowers
to-end manner. project
One-click service Supports one-click packet None acceptance None
performance test loss, delay, and delay jitter costs.
tests for Ethernet services and
MPLS tunnels that are
deployed in an end-to-end
manner.
Automatic tests with no need Simulating the Smartbits None None

for any instrument function, supports delay,
throughput, short-term packet
loss ratio, and long-term
packet loss ratio tests for
VLAN-based E-Line
services.


Control Difference
Between
Versions
Performance Network- The performance None Optimized None

monitoring level management system (PMS) monitoring
and performance embedded in the U2000 points, rich
measurement monitoring supports unified monitoring service
and and measurement of any monitoring
measurement measurement object and methods
system performance indicator in the Visualized
network. monitoring;
It supports 24-hour service network-
status pre-warning and level and
monitoring, and provides service-
equipment performance centered
threshold-crossing alarms and monitoring
network performance
threshold-crossing alarms.
360-degree Allows all-service-layer (port, Yes None

traffic MPLS tunnel, PW, and
statistics and VLAN) traffic statistics and
monitoring monitoring in a service view.
based on Supports QoS packet loss
service paths detection.
Visualized Queries and For E-Line services, allows Yes Service None
O&M display of users to find the service visualization
service paths working path and protection
based on path views based VLANs.
VLANs For E-LAN services, allows
users to find the VLAN
domain views based on
VLANs.
Queries and For E-LAN services, allows Yes None

display of users to find the actual MAC
service paths address forwarding path
based on views based on MAC
MAC addresses.
addresses
Display of Illustrates the running status None None

L2 protocol of the spanning tree protocol
status and ERPS protocol of each
information NE in the service view.
based on
service paths


Control Difference
Between
Versions
Intelligent fault diagnosis Performs automatic fault Yes Intelligent None

diagnosis for Ethernet fault
services by layer diagnosis
(service/PW/tunnel/port) and Cross-
by level (connectivity/ product fault
performance/configuration). diagnosis
Quickly outputs fault
diagnosis reports on a one-
click operation GUI.
IP ping Initiates IP ping packets to None In

and responds to IP ping V200R012C
packets sent from client 00,
equipment, therefore quickly V200R012C
narrowing down the fault 01, and
location to the client V200R013C
equipment or the transport 00, only IP
network. ping
Support near-end or far-end responding is
IP ping responding. supported.
Supports initiating an IP ping In
test to the near-end or far-end. V200R013C
10 or a later
version, IP
ping
initiating and
responding
are
supported.
Network-level E-LAN Checks whether an E-LAN Yes None

service loop detection service on an NE forms a
loop.
Automatically shuts down a
looped service.
Displays the loopback path.
1.1.4 Built-In WDM, Flexible Networking

The OptiX OSN equipment uses the built-in WDM technology to transmit several
wavelengths over one optical fiber. In this manner, the OptiX OSN equipment can be
interconnected with the WDM equipment.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment
are as follows:

l Standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or
dropped.
l Standard CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 can be added or
dropped.
l A set of equipment can be configured into an Optical Terminal Multiplexer (OTM) or an
Optical Add/Drop multiplexer (OADM), or both.
l Optical add/drop multiplexing boards have concatenation ports which can be used for
expansion or for adding/dropping multiple wavelengths through concatenation.
l The equipment supports Raman amplifiers which can be used in long-distance signal
transmission.
l The equipment supports the automatic gain control technology, which enables the gain of
each working wavelength to change within an allowed range in all scenarios.
l The equipment supports the forward error correction (FEC) technology, which can
correct the errors generated during signal transmission and therefore improve the
tolerance of signal-to-noise ratio at the receive end and extend the length of relay
sections.
Figure 1-4 Application of built-in WDM technology
1.2 Product Specifications

This section describes the appearances and specifications of OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 1-3 Product appearances and specifications

Indicator and Description
Specifications
Appearance
Dimensions (H x W x D) 722 mm x 497 mm x 295 mm
Number of valid slots 15 for processing boards and 16 for interface boards
Equipment Packet 160 Gbit/s

capacity
200 Gbit/s higher order cross-connections and 20 Gbit/s
TDM
lower order cross-connections
Service type supported SDH, PDH, ATM, CES, Ethernet , PCM, SAN, video and
others
Smart line board HSNS3: 40 Gbit/s for a single optical port
Network topology Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring with chain, intersecting
rings, tangent rings
Backup and Network- Tunnel 1:1/1+1 APS, PW 1:1/1+1 APS, packet linear MSP,
protection level LPT, MSTP, MRPS
protection
(packet)
l SDH protection: subnet connection protection, linear

Network- MSP, ring MSP, E1 SNCP, DNI protection, shared-fiber
level virtual path protection, optical-path-shared MSP
protection
(TDM) l EoS protection: LCAS, LPT, STP/RSTP, MSTP, ERPS,
RPR, VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection


Specifications
l Packet: LAG, MC-LAG

l TDM: TPS, BPS, PPS, LAG, DLAG, 1+1 protection for
ATM boards, 1+1 protection for wavelength conversion
units
Device- l 1+1 hot backup for cross-connect and timing units
level l 1+1 hot backup for SCC units
protection
l 1+1 hot backup for power input units
l 1:N protection for +3.3 V power supply of the board
l Intelligent fan
l Board protection modes under abnormal conditions
Maintenance MPLS CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Ping, Traceroute

OAM
MPLS-TP CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM (only single-ended LM), DM,
OAM TST, LCK, CSF (only PW CSF)
l Ethernet service OAM: CC, LB, LT, LM (only single-

ended LM), DM (only two-way DM)
ETH OAM
(packet) l Ethernet port OAM: OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, remote loopback, fault
detection, self-loop detection
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM: CC, LB, LT, OAM_Ping

(TDM) l Ethernet port OAM: OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, remote loopback, fault
detection, self-loop detection
Synchronizati Packet l Physical-layer clock

on l Synchronous Ethernet
l IEEE 1588v2
l CES ACR
TDM Physical-layer clock
DCN Outband HWECC, IP over DCC, OSI over DCC

DCN
Inband HWECC, IP
DCN


Specifications
TP-Assist l Service configuration: supports end-to-end service

configuration and automatic deployment of alarm
management.
l Service commissioning: supports the one-click service
connectivity test, one-click service performance test, and
automatic test without any instrument.
l Routine maintenance: supports performance statistics
and monitoring and E-Line and E-LAN service path
visualization.
l Fault diagnosis: supports intelligent fault locating, IP
ping initiation and response, and service loopback
detection.
Standard working voltage l If the standard voltage of the input power is -48 V, the
power voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -57.6 V.
l If the standard voltage of the input power is -60 V, the
power voltage ranges from -48 V to -72 V.
Installation method ETSI cabinet
Equipment Subrack l Long-time operation: 0ºC to 45ºC

running temperatur l Short-time operation: -5ºC to +55ºC
environment e
Subrack l Long-time operation: 5-85%

humidity l Short-time operation: 5-95%
(relatively)
Reliability System 0.999996370

specifications availability
Mean time 1h
to
resolution
(MTTR)
Mean time 31.45 years

between
failures
(MTBF)

Product Description 2 Product Networking
2 Product Networking
The OptiX OSN 3500 intelligent optical transmission system (the OptiX OSN 3500 for short)
developed by Huawei is the next-generation intelligent optical transmission equipment.
The OptiX OSN 3500 is of a "universal switch" architecture. That is, the OptiX OSN 3500
can be used in packet mode or in TDM mode. When used with the other equipment of
Huawei, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports various networking applications, such as the pure
packet mode application, hybrid networking application (overlay networking of the packet
mode and TDM mode), and pure TDM mode application. By using a proper networking
solution, the data service and conventional SDH service can be processed in the optimal
manner.
Network Application
As shown in Figure 2-1, the OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and
backbone layer of the metropolitan area network (MAN). The network application scenarios
are described as follows:
l In TDM networking, can be networked with the other OptiX transmission equipment
(the OptiX OSN 9560, OptiX OSN 9500, OptiX OSN 7500 II, OptiX OSN 7500, OptiX
OSN 3500 II, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500, OptiX OSN 500, and OptiX OSN
550) to optimize the carrier's investment.
l With the packet switching technology, can constitute a packet data transmission network
with the other OptiX transmission equipment (the OptiX OSN 7500 II, OptiX OSN
7500, OptiX OSN 1500, OptiX OSN 500, OptiX OSN 550, OptiX PTN 910, OptiX PTN
950, OptiX PTN 1900, OptiX PTN 3900, and OptiX RTN 900) to meet the requirement
for bearing IP services.
l Can be flexibly networked with WDM equipment and Metro equipment.
l Can transparently transmit services over third-party Layer 2 networks, allowing end-to-
end configuration and management.

Product Description 2 Product Networking
Figure 2-1 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 9560
OptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 7500 II
Backbone
layer

OptiX OSN 3500 II
Convergence
layer

OptiX OSN 500
Access
layer
OptiX OSN 550
GSM/CDMA/
WCDMA/TD- PSTN Ethernet ... ATM SAN
SCDMA

Product Description 3 Products Application
3 Products Application
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various networking topologies.

3.1 Typical Networking in Packet Mode
In packet mode, the equipment mainly supports two different typical networking scenarios,
depending on whether routers are used.
3.2 Networking with the Packet Domain Overlapping the TDM Domain
The packet features of the OptiX OSN equipment enable the equipment to overlap the
Ethernet service network based in packet domain on the TDM network.
3.3 Hybrid Networking with Other Huawei Equipment
Universal switch OptiX OSN 3500 can flexibly construct a network with other Huawei
equipment.

3.1 Typical Networking in Packet Mode

In packet mode, the equipment mainly supports two different typical networking scenarios,
depending on whether routers are used.
3.1.1 Typical Networking Without Routers

OptiX OSN equipment can construct a network where TDM services and packet services are
transmitted between base stations and the RNC without assistance from routers.
Figure 3-1 shows the typical networking diagram.
Figure 3-1 Typical networking diagram (without any routers)
As shown in Figure 3-1, NE1 and NE2 are generally OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX OSN 500 or
OptiX OSN 550 NEs; NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 are generally OptiX OSN 580 or OptiX
OSN 3500 or OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 7500 II NEs; NE7 and NE8 are generally
OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 7500 II NEs.
FE services from NodeBs at the access layer are aggregated to the GE packet ring through
NE1 and NE2, then to the 10GE packet rings through NE3 and NE6, and finally to the RNC.
3.1.2 Hybrid Networking with Routers

Hybrid MSTP equipment on a Layer 2 network can be connected to an RNC through routers,
which provide powerful Layer 3 switching capabilities and enhance network scalability.
Service Bearing
This solution supports TDM services and Ethernet/IP services.
l TDM services are carried by single-homed SDH equipment.
l Ethernet and IP services are carried by an L2VPN on the Hybrid MSTP network, and are
forwarded based on IP addresses or carried by an L3VPN on the CX network.

The Hybrid MSTP network transmits E-Line or E-LAN services to its interconnected CX
equipment. The CX equipment terminates Layer 2 VLANs and transmits services to
Layer 3.
Network Topologies
The Hybrid MSTP equipment can be interconnected with routers to form a ring or chain
network. There are various types of equipment applicable to each transmission layer.
l Access layer: OptiX OSN 1500, OptiX OSN 500, or OptiX OSN 550
l Convergence layer: OptiX OSN 580, OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500, or OptiX
OSN 7500 II
l Core layer: OptiX OSN 7500, OptiX OSN 7500 II, or CX 600
Common network topologies are as follows:
l Triangle-shaped network
Figure 3-2 shows a typical triangle-shaped network. MPLS tunnel/PW APS is
configured between Hybrid MSTP access equipment and Hybrid MSTP convergence
equipment. LAGs are configured on Hybrid MSTP convergence equipment and E-
Trunks are configured on CX equipment to protect services on the links in between.
Figure 3-2 Triangle-shaped network
l Rectangle-shaped network
Figure 3-3 shows a typical rectangle-shaped network. MPLS tunnel/PW APS groups
that are co-sourced but not co-sinked are configured on the Hybrid MSTP equipment that
is connected to base stations. Working and protection tunnels/PWs are separately
terminated on two pieces of Hybrid MSTP equipment that is connected to CX
equipment. E-LANs are configured on the Hybrid MSTP equipment connected to CX
equipment and VRRP groups are configured on CX equipment to provide link-level and
equipment-level protection. Convergence equipment is dual-homed to shed the risks that
convergence and core layer equipment faults bring about.

Figure 3-3 Rectangle-shaped network
3.1.3 Traversing a Third-Party Layer 2 Network

The OptiX OSN equipment can add VLAN IDs specific to different MPLS tunnels. This
enables services to traverse a third-party Layer 2 network in the packet domain.
Figure 3-4 shows the typical topology where services traverse a third-party Layer 2 network.
Figure 3-4 Typical topology where services traverse a third-party Layer 2 network
As shown in Figure 3-4, NE1 and NE2 are OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX OSN 500/550 NEs;
NE3, NE4, and NE5 are generally OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500, or OptiX OSN 7500
II NEs. On the access side, NE3 and NE4 form a GE ring with NE1 and NE2; on the network
side, NE3 and NE4 are interconnected with a third-party network.
On the access side, FE services from the NodeBs enter the GE ring through NE1 and NE2.
NE3 and NE4 add VLAN IDs specific to different MPLS tunnels. Then, the services traverse

the third-party Layer 2 network and arrive at NE5. Finally, NE5 switches MPLS tunnel labels,
and transmits the services to the RNC.
In the opposite direction, the RNC transmits services to NE5. NE5 adds VLAN IDs specific
to different MPLS tunnels. Then, the services traverse the third-party Layer 2 network and
arrive at NE3 and NE4. Finally, NE3 and NE4 switch MPLS tunnel labels, and transmit the
services to the NodeBs.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports end-to-end configuration and management for its
services that traverse a third-party Layer 2 network.
3.2 Networking with the Packet Domain Overlapping the

TDM Domain
The packet features of the OptiX OSN equipment enable the equipment to overlap the
Ethernet service network based in packet domain on the TDM network.
Access Layer Overlaid with the GE Ring, Convergence/Core Layer Overlaid with
the 10GE Ring
The OptiX OSN equipment can be used to transmit Ethernet services in packet domain
overlaying on the TDM network.
Figure 3-5 shows that the packet service and SDH service exist on the same network. The
packet service is transmitted on the packet ring, and the SDH service is transmitted on the
TDM ring. There is no interference between the two types of services.
After the IP-based telecommunication is realized, the OptiX OSN equipment can be smoothly
upgraded to the pure packet domain. Hence, the increasing requirements for packet services
can be satisfied.
Figure 3-5 The access layer overlaid with the GE ring and the convergence/core layer
overlaid with the 10GE ring

l In the preceding typical networking diagram, the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX OSN
500/550 is generally used at the access layer, and the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 is generally
used at the convergence/core layer.
l At the access layer, SDH services are transmitted on the STM-1/STM-4 ring and packet
services are transmitted on the GE ring. At the backbone/convergence layer, SDH
services are transmitted on the STM-16/STM-64 ring and packet services are transmitted
on the 10GE ring.
l SDH services are transmitted in TDM domain and packet services are transmitted in
packet domain.
l In the overlay networking of the TDM domain and packet domain, the OptiX OSN
equipment in TDM domain uses the end-to-end TDM service protection, and the OptiX
OSN equipment in packet domain uses the end-to-end Tunnel/PW protection that
realizes protection switching under 50 ms.
Using the EoD Board to Overlay the Convergence/Core Layer with the 10GE
Ring
The OptiX OSN equipment can use the EoD board to directly access Ethernet services
through the TDM ring at the access layer. Figure 3-6 shows how this function is realized.
As the packet service increases, the EoD board provides a solution for the expansion of the
SDH network and improves the utilization of the equipment at the access layer.
Figure 3-6 Using the EoD board to overlay the convergence/core layer with the 10GE ring
l In the preceding typical networking diagram, the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX OSN
500/550 is generally used at the access layer, and the OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II is
generally used at the convergence/core layer.

l As shown in Figure 3-6, only the TDM domain is available at the STM-1/STM-4 access
layer. The OptiX OSN 1500 transmits the E1 and FE services that are accessed by the
base station to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II.
l At the backbone/convergence layer, the 10GE packet ring and the STM-16/STM-64
TDM ring are available. The OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II uses the EoD board
(EDQ41) to transmit two types of services in TDM domain and packet domain
separately at the backbone/convergence layer. That is, E1 services are transmitted on the
STM-16/STM-64 ring at the backbone/convergence layer, and FE services are
transmitted on the 10GE ring at the backbone/convergence layer. The purpose is to
realize the end-to-end transmission of E1 services to the BSC and the end-to-end
transmission of FE services to the RNC.
3.3 Hybrid Networking with Other Huawei Equipment

Universal switch OptiX OSN 3500 can flexibly construct a network with other Huawei
equipment.
3.3.1 Hybrid Networking with the PTN Equipment

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the PTN equipment, therefore
implementing end-to-end management.
As shown in Figure 3-7, the hybrid networking allows more flexible reform of the existing
network and optimal utilization of the network resources.

Figure 3-7 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and PTN equipment
NMS RNC BSC RNC BSC
GE STM-1 GE STM-1
10GE Ring
STM-16/64
Ring
STM-1/4
Ring SDH line board
10GE Ethernet board
E1 E1
GE Ring
FE
FE
BTS BTS
FE
TDM ring NodeB
Packet ring PTN equipment NodeB
TDM domain
MSTP equipment NodeB
Packet domain
l In the preceding typical networking, the OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX OSN 500/550 or the
OptiX PTN 910/950/1900 is used at the access layer.
l At the backbone/convergence layer, the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 or the OptiX PTN 3900
is used.
l See Figure 3-7. In packet domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX
OSN 1500 or the OptiX PTN equipment, accesses the FE services from the 3G base
stations, and transmits the FE services to the GE packet ring, then to the 10GE
convergence/backbone ring, and finally to the RNC. In this manner, the FE services from
the base stations are transmitted to the RNC in an end-to-end manner.
l See Figure 3-7. In TDM domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX
OSN 1500 or the OptiX OSN 500/550, accesses the E1 services from the BTS to the
STM-1/STM-4 ring consisting of the MSTP equipment and then transmits the service to
the STM-16/STM-64 ring consisting of the OptiX OSN equipment (convergence/
backbone layer) and finally to the BSC. In this manner, the E1 services from the BTS are
transmitted to the BSC in an end-to-end manner.
l In the hybrid networking of the MSTP equipment, and the PTN equipment, a unified
NMS is used.

3.3.2 Hybrid Networking with the RTN Equipment

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the RTN equipment, therefore
implementing end-to-end management.
As shown in Figure 3-8, hybrid networking allows more flexible reform of the existing
network and optimal utilization of the network resources.
Figure 3-8 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and RTN equipment
l In the preceding typical networking, the OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX RTN equipment is
used at the access layer.

l The OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II is often used at the convergence/backbone layer.

l See Figure 3-8. In packet domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX
OSN 1500 or the OptiX RTN equipment, accesses the FE services from the NodeB, and
transmits the FE services to the GE packet ring, then to the 10GE convergence/backbone
ring, and finally to the RNC. In this manner, the FE services from the base stations are
transmitted to the RNC in an end-to-end manner.
l See Figure 3-8. In TDM domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX
OSN 1500 accesses the E1 services from the BTS to the STM-1/STM-4 ring consisting
of the MSTP equipment and then transmits the service to the STM-16/STM-64 ring
consisting of the OptiX OSN equipment (convergence/backbone layer) and finally to the
BSC. In this manner, the E1 services from the BTS are transmitted to the BSC in an end-
to-end manner.
l In the hybrid networking of the MSTP equipment, and the RTN equipment, a unified
NMS is used.

Product Description 4 System Architecture
4 System Architecture
This chapter describes the system architecture of the OptiX OSN equipment.
The OptiX OSN equipment uses various boards and forms a system architecture where the
SDH cross-connect matrix unit and the packet switching unit are the core. As shown in
Figure 4-1, the system architecture of the OptiX OSN equipment consists of the units listed in
Table 4-1.
Figure 4-1 System architecture
Network-
Network-side User-side User-side
service side service Core units service service
signals interface
interface unit signals
unit
Synchro System
Overhead Power Auxiliary
-nous control and
processing interface interface
timing communi-
unit unit unit
unit cation unit

Product Description 4 System Architecture
Table 4-1 Units supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Unit Description
Network- TDM mode:

side l SDH interface unit
service
interface l WDM unit
units l Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit
Packet mode:
l Ethernet interface unit
l CES interface unit
l ATM/IMA interface unit
Core units TDM mode: SDH cross-connect matrix unit

Packet mode: Packet switching unit
User-side TDM mode:

service l SDH interface unit
interface
units l PDH interface unit
l DDN interface unit
l RPR interface unit
l SAN/Video interface unit
l PCM interface unit
Packet mode:
l CES interface unit
Common l Overhead processing unit

units l Synchronous timing unit
l Power interface unit
l Auxiliary interface unit
l System control and communication unit

Product Description 5 Hardware Structure
5 Hardware Structure
About This Chapter
The equipment can house various types of boards and can reside in several types of cabinets.
5.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of a cabinet, subracks, and boards.
5.2 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.2600
mm high T63 cabinets are discontinued. For details, see the released product change notice.
5.3 Subrack
A subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
5.4 Boards
The equipment supports various types of boards.

5.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of a cabinet, subracks, and boards.
Figure 5-1 shows the composition of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 5-1 Composition of the OptiX OSN 3500

1 4
7 8
7
H
D W
1. DC power distribution unit 2. Side panel 3. Cable distribution plate 4. Orderwire phone fixing frame
(PDU)
5. Subrack 6. Cabinet 7. Fiber management tray 8. Front door
5.2 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.2600
mm high T63 cabinets are discontinued. For details, see the released product change notice.

NOTE
The cabinets described in this topic are provided by Huawei.
The 300 mm ETSI cabinet is available in two types, namely, T63 cabinet and N63E cabinet.
The 600 mm ETSI cabinet is called the N66T cabinet. The N66T cabinet uses both the front
and rear columns, and it has a single front door and a single rear door. Table 5-1 shows the
appearances of the cabinets.
Table 5-1 Types, appearances, and specifications of the cabinets supported by OptiX OSN
equipment
Item T63 Cabinet N63E Cabinet N66T Cabinet
Appearanc
e
Weight l 2000 mm-high l 2000 mm-high l 2000 mm-high

cabinet: 58 kg cabinet: 41 kg cabinet: 71kg
l 2200 mm-high l 2200 mm-high l 2200 mm-high
cabinet: 63 kg cabinet: 45 kg cabinet: 76kg
l 2600 mm-high
cabinet: 73 kg
Dimension l 600 (W) x 300 (D) x l 600 (W) x 300 (D) x l 600 (W) x 600 (D) x
s 2000 (H) 2000 (H) 2000 (H)
l 600 (W) x 300 (D) x l 600 (W) x 300 (D) x l 600 (W) x 600 (D) x
2200 (H) 2200 (H) 2200 (H)
l 600 (W) x 300 (D) x
2600 (H)
Available l 2000 mm (height): l 2000 mm (height): l 2000 mm (height):

space 40 U 40 U 40 U
l 2200 mm (height): l 2200 mm (height): l 2200 mm (height):
45 U 45 U 45 U
l 2600 mm (height):
54 U
NOTE
1 U = 44.5 mm
NOTE
The N66T cabinet supports back-to-back installation of one ordinary OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and one
enhanced OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (1,100 W).

5.3 Subrack
A subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
5.3.1 Structure
An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of an interface
board area, a processing board area, a fan area, and a cable routing area.
Figure 5-2 shows the structure of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Figure 5-2 Structure of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
1. Interface board area 2. Fan area

3. Processing board area 4. Cable routing area
The functions of the areas are as follows:
l Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.
l Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the
equipment.
l Processing board area: This area houses the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.

l Cable routing area: This area houses fiber jumpers in a subrack.

NOTE
An interface board is also called an access board or a transit board. An interface board provides physical
interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical signals or electrical signals
to the corresponding processing board.
5.3.2 Slot Allocation

An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of an upper layer and a lower layer. The upper layer,
where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18
slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
Figure 5-3 shows the single-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Figure 5-3 Slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
OSN 3500
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P P A
I I U
U U X
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G G
X X S S
C C C C
S S C C
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 5-4 shows the dual-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Figure 5-4 Dual-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
OSN 3500
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P P A
I I U
U U X
S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T
1 3 5 7 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 3 5 7 8
G G
X X S S
C C C C
S S C C
The slots in an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack are allocated as follows:
l Slots for service interface boards: slots 19-26 and 29-36

l Slots for service processing boards: slots 1-8 and 11-17
l Slots for cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9-10
l Slots for system control and communication boards: slots 17-18 (slot 17 can also house a
processing board)
l Slots for power interface boards: slots 27-28

l Slot for an auxiliary interface board: slot 37

l Slots for fan boards: slots 38-40
NOTE
In an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, dual-slot boards and single-slot boards cannot be installed at the same
time.
Mapping Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 5-2 lists the mapping between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards.
Table 5-2 Mapping between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards
Slot for Dual-Slot for Slot for Corresponding Interface Board
Processing Processing Board
Board
Slot 2 - Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3 Slot 3 Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4 - Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 29 and 30
Slot 14 - Slot 31 and 32
Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 33 and 34
Slot 16 - Slot 35 and 36
Paired Slots
If overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are called
paired slots. Paired slots achieves automatic transparent transmission of overhead bytes such
as K bytes, D bytes, and E1 overhead bytes. This improves multiplex section protection
(MSP) switching performance and protects orderwire and DCC communication with other
NEs even after the system control board on the local NE cannot be detected. Table 5-3 lists
paired slots.
Table 5-3 Paired slots

Cross-Connect Slot Paired Slot
Capacity
200 Gbit/s Slot 2 Slot 17
Slot 3 Slot 16
Slot 4 Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 14

Cross-Connect Slot Paired Slot

Capacity
Slot 6 Slot 13
Slot 7 Slot 12
Slot 8 Slot 11
5.4 Boards
The equipment supports various types of boards.
NOTE
For details on the board version replacement relationship between boards, see Board Version
Replacement in the Hardware Description.
Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards
Table 5-4 List of cross-connect boards and system control boards
Board Version Description
GSCC N4, N6 System control and communication board
PSXCS N1 Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board

(supporting packet features)
PSXCSA N2, N3 Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board

(supporting packet features)
SXCSA N1 Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board (only

applicable in TDM mode)
IXCSA N1 Infinitely enhanced cross-connect and timing board (only

applicable in TDM mode)
NOTE
Only the N3PSXCSA board support MPLS-TP OAM and centralized MPLS OAM.
Packet Processing Boards
Table 5-5 List of packet processing boards
PEX2 N1 2x10GE Ethernet processing board
PEX1 N1, N2 1x10GE Ethernet processing board

PEG16 N1 16xGE Ethernet processing board
PEG8 N1 8xGE Ethernet processing board
Packet Interface Boards
Table 5-6 List of packet interface boards

CQ1 N1 4-port channelized STM-1 CES optical interface board
PEFF8 N1 8xFE optical interface board
PETF8 N1 8xFE electrical interface board
MD12 N1 Multi-protocol 32xE1 interface board (120 ohms)
MD75 N1 Multi-protocol 32xE1 interface board (75 ohms)
EoD Boards
Table 5-7 List of EoD boards

EDQ41 N1 4x622/155M SDH optical interface Ethernet dual-mode

multi-function processing board
Smart Line Boards
Table 5-8 List of smart line boards

HSNS3 N1 Smart 40G line service processing board

SDH Boards
Table 5-9 List of SDH boards

SLD64 N4 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
SFD64 N4 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
SF64 N1, N4 1xSTM-64 optical interface board (with the forward error
correction (FEC) function)
SF64A N1 1xSTM-64 optical interface board (with the forward error

correction (FEC) function)
SL64 N1 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
SLO16 N1, N4 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
SLQ16 N1, N2, N4 4xSTM-16 optical interface board
SL16 N1, N2, N3 1xSTM-16 optical interface board
SL16A N1, N2, N3 1xSTM-16 optical interface board
SF16 N1 1xSTM-16 optical interface board (with the outband FEC

function)
SF16E N1 1xSTM-16 optical interface board (with the outband

EFEC function)
SLH41 N3 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
SLQ41 N3 4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
SLQ4 N1, N2 4xSTM-4 optical interface board
SLQ4A N1 4xSTM-4 optical interface board
SLD4 N1, N2 2xSTM-4 optical interface board
SLD4A N1 2xSTM-4 optical interface board
SL4 N1, N2 1xSTM-4 optical interface board
SL4A N1 1xSTM-4 optical interface board
SLH1 N1 16xSTM-1 signal processing board
SLT1 N1 12xSTM-1 optical interface board

EU08 N1 8xSTM-1 electrical interface board
OU08 N1 8xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board (LC)
OU08 N2 8xSTM-1 optical interface board (SC)
SLO1 N2, N3 8xSTM-1 optical interface board
SLQ1 N1, N2 4xSTM-1 optical interface board
SLQ1A N1 4xSTM-1 optical interface board
EU04 N1 4xSTM-1 electrical interface board
SEP1 N1 2xSTM-1 line processing board when interfaces are

available on the front panel
8xSTM-1 line processing board when interfaces are
available on the corresponding interface board
SL1 N1, N2 1xSTM-1 optical interface board
SL1A N1 1xSTM-1 optical interface board
PDH Boards
Table 5-10 List of PDH boards

SPQ4 N1, N2 4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board
MU04 N1 4xE4/STM-1 electrical interface board
PQ3 N2 12xE3/T3 service processing board
D34S N1 6xE3/T3 electrical switching interface board
C34S N1 3xE3/T3 electrical switching interface board
PD3 N1, N2 6xE3/T3 service processing board
PL3 N1, N2 3xE3/T3 service processing board
PL3A N1, N2 3xE3/T3 service processing board (Interfaces are

available on the front panel.)
PQ1 N1, N2 63xE1 service processing board
PQM N1 63xE1/T1 service processing board
D12B N1 32xE1/T1 electrical switching interface board
D12S N1 32xE1/T1 electrical switching interface board (120 ohms)

D75S N1 32xE1 electrical switching interface board (75 ohms)
PFL1 N1 8xE1 optical processing board
TSB8 N1 8-port electrical switching interface board
TSB4 N1 4-port electrical switching interface board
DX1 N1, N3 DDN service accessing and converging board
DXA N1 DDN service converging and processing board
DM12 N1 DDN service interface board
EoS Boards
Table 5-11 List of EoS boards
EFT8 N1, N2 8xFE/16xFE Ethernet transparent transmission board
EFT8A N1, N2 8xFE Ethernet transparent transmission board
EFS0A N1 16xFE Ethernet processing board
EFS0 N1, N2, N4, 8xFE Ethernet processing board

N5
EFS4 N1, N2, N3 4xFE Ethernet processing board
EAS2 N1, N3 2x10GE Layer 2 Ethernet processing board
EMS4 N1 4xGE and 16xFE Ethernet processing board
EMS2 N1 2xGE and 16xFE Ethernet processing board
EGS4 N1, N3, N4 4xGE Ethernet processing board
EGT2 N1, N2 2xGE Ethernet transparent transmission board
EGS2 N2, N3 2xGE Ethernet processing board
EFF8 N1 8x100M Ethernet optical interface board
EFF8A N1 8x100M Ethernet optical interface board
ETF8A N1 8x100M Ethernet twisted-pair interface board
ETF8 N1 8x100M Ethernet twisted-pair interface board
ETS8 N1 8x10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching

board

ATM Boards
Table 5-12 List of ATM boards
ADL4 N1 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board
IDL4 N1 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board
ADQ1 N1 4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board
IDQ1 N1 4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board
RPR Boards
Table 5-13 List of RPR boards
EGR2 N2 2xGE ring processing board
EMR0 N2 12xFE and 1xGE ring processing board
SAN/Video Boards
Table 5-14 List of SAN/video boards
VST4 N1 4-port video service transparent transmission board
MST4 N1 4-port multi-service transparent transmission board
PCM Boards
Table 5-15 List of PCM boards
FXSO12 N1 12-channel FXS/FXO processing board
FXS12 N1 12-channel FXS processing board
FXO12 N1 12-channel FXO processing board
AT6 N1, N2 6-channel 2/4-wire audio or E&M processing board

WDM Boards
Table 5-16 List of WDM boards

CMR4 TN11 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
CMR2 TN11 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR2 TN11 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR2A N1 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR2C N1 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR4 TN11 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
CMD2 N1 2-channel bidirectional optical multiplexer and

demultiplexer board
LWX N1 Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board
FIB N1 Filter isolating board
Auxiliary Boards
Table 5-17 List of auxiliary boards

AUX N1 System auxiliary interface board
FAN N1 Fan board
Optical Amplifier Boards
Table 5-18 List of optical amplifier boards

BPA N1, N2 One-channel power amplifier and one-channel pre-

amplifier board
COA N1, 61, 62 Case-shaped optical amplifier
OBU1 TN11 Optical booster amplifier board
OBU2 TN12 Optical booster amplifier board
BA2 N1 Two-channel power amplifier board
RPC01 N1 Forward Raman driving board (external)

RPC02 N1 Backward Raman driving board (external)
Dispersion Compensation Boards
Table 5-19 List of dispersion compensation boards

DCU N1, N2 Dispersion compensation board
Power Boards
Table 5-20 List of power boards

UPM - Uninterruptible power module
PIUA N1 Power interface board (supporting 1100 W enhanced

subrack)
PIUB N1 Power interface board (supporting type III subracks)

Product Description 6 Functions and Features in Packet Mode
6 Functions and Features in Packet Mode
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the capacity, services, clock, and protection schemes of the OptiX OSN
equipment in packet mode.
6.1 Capacity
This section describes the switching capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN
6.2 Services
This section describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum receiving capacity of each
service type supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode.
6.3 Equipment Level Protection
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes.
6.4 Network Level Protection
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various network level protection schemes.

6.1 Capacity
This section describes the switching capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN
6.1.1 Packet Switching Capacity

The OptiX OSN equipment uses packet cross-connect boards to support packet switching.
Table 6-1 provides the maximum switching capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 6-1 Maximum switching capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Maximum Switching Access Capacity of a
Capacity Single Subrack
N1PSXCS 80 Gbit/s 60 Gbit/s
N2PSXCSA, 160 Gbit/s 100 Gbit/s

N3PSXCSA
6.1.2 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode

This section describes the access capacity of each slot on the equipment.
When the N1PSXCS board is used, one service processing board occupies two slots. In this
case, adjacent slots can be merged, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N1PSXCS board is used
(dual-slot)
S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T
1 3 5 7 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 3 5 7 8
7.5Gbit/s
7.5Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
XCS
XCS
5Gbit/s
GSCC
GSCC

Figure 6-2 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N2PSXCSA or
N3PSXCSA board is used.
Figure 6-2 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA
board is used (single slots)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
GSCC
GSCC
XCS
XCS
6.2 Services
This section describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum receiving capacity of each
service type supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode.
6.2.1 Service Description

In packet mode, the OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet services , ATM/IMA
services,and CES services.
6.2.1.1 Service Models

The OptiX OSN equipment adopts different layered models on the UNI and NNI sides when
it is interconnected with different devices on the two sides.
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the MPLS-based PWE3 model to process packet services.
NOTE
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports only static label allocation of PWE3.

Basic Concepts
The associated basic concepts are customer edge (CE), provider edge (PE), and provider (P),
as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 PWE3 networking diagram
PE
CE P P CE
PE PE
CE
CE
l CE: provides interfaces. A CE can be a router, an exchange, or a host. Generally, a CE

need not support MPLS.
l PE: refers to an edge device of the service provider (SP) network, which is directly
connected to a CE.
l P: refers to a backbone router on the SP network, which is indirectly connected to a CE.
A P provides only the MPLS forwarding function.
MPLS-Based PWE3 Model

Figure 6-4 shows the MPLS-based PWE3 model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that
functions as a PE.

Figure 6-4 MPLS-based PWE3 model
UNI NNI
Forw arder
Local service Ethernet ATM TDM TDM ATM Ethernet Emulation service lalyer
processing layer sw itching sw itching sw itching
PWE3 PWE3 encapsulation layer
PW label
Service Ethernet ATM/IMA MPLS layer
TDM
interface layer
Tunnel label
FE/
GE/
Physical E1/ 10GE Data link layer and physical layer
FE GE 10GE E1 cSTM-1
layer
Ethernet
Interconnecting
w ith the CE Connecting to the PSN
On the UNI side, a PE is interconnected with a CE and accesses services from users to the
PSN. The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3 model have the following functions on the UNI
side:
l Physical layer
The physical layer provides the interfaces between the OptiX OSN equipment and
transmission media (such as electrical cables and optical fibers).
– In the CE->PE direction, the physical layer processes the physical signals (optical
or electrical signals) from the CE, extracts information from the signals, and then
sends the information to the service interface layer.
– In the PE->CE direction, the physical layer receives information from the service
interface layer, converts the information to signals that can be transmitted over the
transmission media, and then transmits the signals to the CE through physical
channels.
l Service interface layer
The service interface layer transmits the services between the physical layer and the local
service processing layer.
– In the CE->PE direction, the service interface layer receives information from the
physical layer, identifies service types, and then sends the services to the respective
parts of the local service processing layer.
– In the PE->CE direction, the service interface layer receives service signals from
the local service processing layer, chooses proper physical channels, and then sends
the service signals to the physical layer.
l Local service processing layer
The local service processing layer processes different services according to user
requirements.

On the NNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with the equipment on the PSN
and transmits user services on the PSN. The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3 model have the
following functions on the NNI side:
l Emulation service layer
The emulation service layer corresponds to the payload to be encapsulated into PWs.
One emulation service corresponds to one PW. This is a logical layer and the OptiX OSN
equipment does not perform any operation at this layer.
l PWE3 encapsulation layer
The PWE3 encapsulation layer uses different encapsulation modes for different
emulation services. At this layer, emulation services are uniformly encapsulated into
PWE3 packets, or different emulation services are decapsulated from PWE3 packets.
l MPLS layer
The MPLS layer includes two layers of MPLS labels.
– The outer MPLS label is a tunnel label, which identifies a tunnel that traverses an
MPLS network between the two PE sites of a service. Such a tunnel carries PWs.
– The inner MPLS label is a PW label, which identifies a PW in a tunnel.
l Data link and physical layer
The data link and physical layer carry the MPLS layer and provide links for data
transmission at the MPLS layer.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet links (GE/10GE interfaces) on the NNI
side.
The forwarder between the UNI and NNI forwards the services that are locally processed on
the UNI side to the NNI side and forwards the emulation services on the NNI side to the UNI
side.
NOTE
It is not recommended that the OptiX OSN equipment use Ethernet links connected to FE electrical
interfaces on the NNI side.
Service Model of Ps
Figure 6-5 shows the service model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that functions as a
P.

Figure 6-5 Service model of the OptiX OSN equipment
NNI NNI
Forwarder
MPLS layer Tunnel label Tunnel label MPLS layer
FE/ FE/
Data link layer GE/ GE/
and physical layer 10GE 10GE Data link layer and
physical layer
Ethernet Ethernet
Transmitted to Transmitted
the PSN to the PSN
On the NNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with the equipment on the PSN
so that services can be transmitted on the PSN.
The OptiX OSN equipment provides only the MPLS forwarding function. That is, the
equipment forwards the MPLS packets according to the forwarding table of tunnel labels and
the MPLS labels.
6.2.1.2 Ethernet Services

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various Ethernet services and provides ideal L2VPN
solutions.
A virtual private network (VPN) is a private network constructed on the basis of the public
network. The L2VPN is the VPN based on technologies of the link layer. The VPN
constructed on the public network can provide the same security, reliability and manageability
as the existing private networks.
Service providers can provide the VPN value-added service for enterprises to fully use the
existing network resources and to increase the service volume. In addition, service providers
can consolidate long-term partnership with enterprises.
For VPN users, the cost to lease the network is saved. The flexibility of the VPN networking
makes the network management easier for enterprises. As the network security and encryption
technology develops, the private data can be transmitted over the public network with
security.
Service Form
For the OptiX OSN equipment, the Ethernet service has the following forms.
l Point-to-point service: E-Line service

l Multipoint-to-multipoint service: E-LAN service

NOTE
The OptiX OSN equipment also supports E-aggr services derived from E-Line and E-LAN services.
Standardization organizations such as ITU-T, IETF and MEF stipulate the model frames for
L2 Ethernet services. Table 6-2 lists these model frames. In this document, the L2 Ethernet
services are of the model frame stipulated by MEF.
Table 6-2 Comparison among L2 Ethernet services stipulation

Service Type Service Transport IETF ITU-T MEF
Multiplex Tunnel Model Model Model
ing
Poin Line Physically Physically - EPL E-Line

t-to- isolated isolated
poin
t Virtual VLAN VLAN - EVPL
serv Line
MPLS VPWS
ice
Mul LAN Physically Physically - EPLAN E-LAN

tipoi isolated isolated
nt-
to- Virtual VLAN Physically - EVPLAN
mult LAN isolated
ipoi VLAN -
nt
serv MPLS VPLS
ice
E-Line Service
Figure 6-6 illustrates the E-Line service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company A has two branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has two branches in City 2
and City 3. Company C has two branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Companies A,
B, and C require data communication. The OptiX OSN equipment can separately provide a
private line service for Companies A, B, and C to meet the communication requirement. In
addition, the service data is completely isolated.

Figure 6-6 E-Line service
Metro Nationwide/Global
carrier Ethernet Metro
carrier Ethernet carrier Ethernet
Company A Company A
Company C Metro Company B

carrier Ethernet
City 1 City 3
E-Line1
E-Line2 City 2
E-Line3 Company B
Company C
E-LAN Service
Figure 6-7 illustrates the E-LAN service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company Z is headquartered in City 3. Branch A of the company is located in City 1 and City
2, and Branch B of the company is located in City 1, City 2, and City 3. Branch A and Branch
B do not communicate with each other, and the data of them should be separated from each
other. The headquarters, however, need to communicate with all the branches and need to
access the Internet.
The OptiX OSN equipment can be used to provide the E-LAN service. Different VLAN tags
are used to identify service data from different branches. In this manner, the headquarters can
communicate with the branches and the data from different branches is isolated. In addition,
the VLAN is used to isolate the Internet data accessed by the headquarters from the internal
service data.

Figure 6-7 E-LAN service
ISP
Nationwide/Global
Metro carrier Ethernet
carrier Ethernet
Branch B Headquarter
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Branch A Metro Branch B
carrier Ethernet
City 1 City 3
VLAN1 City 2
VLAN2
VLAN3 Branch A Branch B Branch A
E-AGGR Service
As shown in Figure 6-8, a mobile carrier needs to build a 3G network to aggregate the
services of each NodeB and then transmit the aggregated service to the radio network
controller (RNC). In this case, the equipment processes the data between each NodeB and the
RNC as one service.
On the convergence node, the OptiX OSN equipment specifies the total bandwidth, QoS, and
other parameters.

Figure 6-8 E-AGGR service
Node B FE
FE RNC
Node B
GE
FE
Node B
6.2.1.3 CES Services

The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber
resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across
the pure packet mode.
At the physical layer on the UNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with a CE
through the following physical channels for accessing CES services:
l Channelized STM-1
l E1

Figure 6-9 Networking diagram of the CES

NMS
RNC BSC
GE S TM- 1 GE
Simulationnode 3
10GE Ring
Simulationnode 2
ST
FE
M-
GE
FE
g
R in
41/
R in
GE
R in
g
NodeB
g
NodeB
Simulationnode 1
E1 E1
FE
B TS B TS
NodeB
Packet ring
MSTP
TDM ring equipment
As shown in Figure 6-9, the OptiX OSN equipment can gain access to CES services at
emulation node 1, emulation node 2, or emulation node 3.
l At emulation node 1, the OptiX OSN 1500 transmits E1 services to the GE packet ring.
l At emulation node 2, the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 7500 II
transmits E1 signals that are received from the BTS through TDM STM-1/STM-4 ring to
the 10GE packet ring.
l At emulation node 3, the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 7500 II
converts E1 CESs on the 10GE packet ring into STM-1 signals and then sends them to
the BSC.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports both structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over
packet switched network (CESoPSN) and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP).
In the case of CESoPSN, the features are as follows:
l The equipment is aware of frame structures, frame alignment modes, and timeslots in
TDM circuits.
l The equipment processes the overheads in and extracts the payloads from the TDM
frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a specific sequence.
As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP, the features are as follows:

l The equipment is agnostic about the structures of the TDM signals. To be specific, the
equipment treats TDM signals as constant bit-rate (CBR) flows, and emulates all the
TDM signals in the same way.
l The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
6.2.1.4 ATM/IMA Services

The OptiX OSN equipment supports ATM/IMA services in packet mode.
ATM Services
ATM stands for asynchronous transfer mode, which is implemented based on cells. In ATM
mode, the ATM PWE3 technology is used to emulate ATM services on a packet switched
network (PSN). Therefore, traditional ATM services can traverse the PSN. ATM service
networks can be classified into three types: one-to-one, N-to-one or ATM-TRANS, according
to the encapsulation mode of ATM PWE3 packets.
Figure 6-10 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in one-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
PSN
PW
AC AC
LSP
CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2
ATM PWE3
1-to-1 ATM 1-to-1 ATM
PWE3 PWE3
service service
Packet transmission equipment NodeB RNC

Figure 6-11 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in N-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
CE1
PSN
PW
AC AC
LSP
CE2 PE1 PE2 CE4
ATM PWE3
N-to-1 ATM N-to-1 ATM
PWE3 PWE3
CE3 service service
Packet transmission equipment NodeB RNC
NOTE
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a PW must be the same.
IMA Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology multiplexes multiple low-speed ATM
links into a high-speed link.
The IMA technology provides inverse multiplexing of an ATM cell stream over multiple low-
speed links and retrieves the original stream at the far-end from these physical links. Figure
6-12 shows how IMA transmits services.
Figure 6-12 IMA transmission
Link 1
Link 2
ATM cell stream Link 3 ATM cell stream
IMA group
The IMA technology helps to group multiple physical links to form a higher bandwidth
logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. When the member links in
the IMA group are dynamically added/deleted, or fail/recover, the logical link changes only in

bandwidth. The services on the logical link are not interrupted only when the bandwidth of
the logical link is not lower than the required minimum bandwidth.
With the IMA technology, the transport network can transmit ATM services from customer
equipment on an IMA group formed by multiple low-speed links (for example, the three E1
links shown in Figure 6-13), therefore increasing link bandwidth utilization and providing
link protection.
Figure 6-13 Application of the IMA technology
IMA group
E1 link
NodeB
Packet transmit equipment
6.2.2 Service Interfaces

This section provides the Ethernet CES and ATM/IMA service interfaces supported by the
OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode.
Table 6-3 lists the Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 6-3 Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment
Type of Interface Description
FE electrical interface 100BASE-TX
FE optical interface 100BASE-FX/LX/VX/ZX
GE electrical interface 1000BASE-T
GE optical interface l 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX

l Colored optical interface types: CWDM (40
km), CWDM (80 km), and DWDM (120 km)
10GE optical interface l 10GBase-SR/SW/LR/LW/ER/EW/ZR/ZW

l Colored optical interface types: CWDM (70
km), DWDM (40 km), and DWDM (80 km)
Table 6-4 lists the CES and ATM/IMA service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 6-4 CES and ATM/IMA service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment
Type of Description
Interface
CES (E1) E1 electrical interface: DB44 connector

interface

Type of Description
Interface
ATM/IMA (E1) E1 electrical interface: DB44 connector

interface
CES (STM-1) STM-1 optical interfaces: S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2

interface
6.2.3 Service Receiving Capacity

The capacities of services that the OptiX OSN equipment can receive vary according to the
type and quantity of the configured boards.
Table 6-5 lists the maximum capacities of different services that the OptiX OSN equipment
can receive. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services when a single
subrack receives only this specific type of service.
Table 6-5 Service receiving capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 (in packet mode)
Service Type Maximum Number of Services
Supported By a Single Subrack
Fast Ethernet (FE electrical interface) services 128
Fast Ethernet (FE optical interface) services 128
Gigabit Ethernet (GE electrical interface) services 80
Gigabit Ethernet (GE optical interface) services 80
10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GE optical interface) 28

services
CES (E1) services 504
CES (channelized STM-1) services 64
E1 ATM/IMA services 504

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes.
Table 6-6 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
equipment.

Table 6-6 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Service Type Protection Scheme Description
Ethernet (in LAG With no need for hardware upgrades, link

packet mode) aggregation binds several Ethernet ports as a
logical port for higher link bandwidth and link
reliability.
MC-LAG Multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-

LAG) is a supplement to the single-chassis link
aggregation group (SC-LAG) and allows
aggregation of inter-chassis links. On a 3G
bearer network, MC-LAG can work with PW
APS to implement dual-homing of E-Line or E-
LAN services when a dual-homed node
becomes faulty or an AC-side link or NNI-side
service fails.
Others 1+1 hot backup for For the OptiX OSN equipment, the cross-
the cross-connect and connect and timing units are integrated in the
timing board cross-connect and timing board. The cross-
connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot
backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and
timing units are protected.
l Slots for working and protection boards: Slot
9 and slot 10
l Switching condition (Any of the following
conditions triggers the switching):
– The working board is offline.
– The working board is cold reset.
– The hardware of the working board fails.
– A switching command is issued.
l Revertive mode: Non-revertive. After
successful switching, the original protection
board becomes the working board. After the
original working board is recovered, the
current working board continues to be the
original protection board.

1+1 hot backup for The active and standby GSCC boards form a
the SCC unit 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active
GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the
protection state.
l Slots for working and protection boards: Sot
18 and slot 17
– The working board is under a hot reset.
– The working board is under a cold reset.
l Revertive mode: Non-revertive. After
successful switching, the original protection
board becomes the working board, and the
original working board becomes the
protection board.
1+1 hot backup for The OptiX OSN equipment can access two
the power interface -48/-60 V DC power supplies by using two PIU
unit boards. These two power supplies provide a
mutual backup for each other. When either of
them fails, the other power supply provides a
backup to ensure normal operation of the
equipment.
If the voltage of the two external power supplies
of the equipment is the same, the two PIU
boards of mutual backup separately share half of
the current.
If the voltage offset value of the two external
power supplies of the equipment is more than
0.7 V, all the current pass the PIU board of the
external power supply that has high voltage, and
no current pass the PIU board of the external
power supply that has low voltage. When only
one PIU board is working, the power supply of
the subrack is not affected.
NOTE
If different boards are configured, the total power
consumption and current of the equipment are
different, and the current value of the PIU boards is
also different. The current values of the PIU boards
are computed according to the actual configuration.

1:N protection for the The OptiX OSN equipment provides reliable
+3.3 V power of the power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of
board other boards by using the power backup unit on
the AUX board. When the power supply of a
board fails, the backup power supply
immediately provides backup to ensure the
normal operation of the board.
NOTE
For the N1PEG16, N1PEX1, N2PEX1, N1PEG8, and
N1PEX2 boards with high power consumption, the
system does not provide 1:N protection for +3.3 V
power.
Intelligent fan The OptiX OSN equipment uses three intelligent

fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The
power supplies of the three fan modules are of
mutual backup. The intelligent fans provide the
functions of intelligent speed regulation and
failure detection. When one fan module
becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at
the full speed. The running status of the fans is
indicated by the corresponding indicators on the
front panel of the fan module.

Board protection The board protection modes under abnormal

modes under conditions include resumable upload (protection
abnormal conditions against power down during software uploading),
undervoltage protection and overvoltage
protection, and over-temperature alarms.
Power-Down Protection During Software
Loading
The verification function is provided for
applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system
(BIOS) does not boot any applications or data
that are not successfully or completely loaded.
Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be
resumed, until the software is successfully and
completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for
Power Supply
The power board provides a lightning protection
component to effectively avoid the damage that
may be caused by transient high voltages such
as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board
automatically resets its CPU so that the software
can re-initialize the chip.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power
system also automatically turns off the power
supply on the main loop so that the system is
protected.
Board Temperature Detection
Temperature detection circuits are built in
boards (for example, the cross-connect and
timing board) that generates a large amount of
heat. When the board detects a high temperature,
an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance
personnel about cleaning the fans.

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various network level protection schemes.
Table 6-7 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 6-7 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Network Protection Description
Level Scheme
Ethernet Tunnel APS Including the MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS-TP
tunnel APS. In the case of tunnel APS, a tunnel is
set to protect the working tunnel. In this case,
when the working tunnel fails, services are
switched to the protection tunnel for transmission
and therefore to realize the service protection.
PW APS Including the MPLS PW APS and MPLS-TP PW

APS. The PW APS uses the protection PW to
protect the working PW. When the working PW is
faulty, the services are switched to the protection
PW and remain unaffected.
LPT With LPT enabled, service protection can be

provided regardless of whether faults occur on a
service access node, a service network, or both on
a service access node and on a service network.
MSTP Like Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is used to
prevent loops on a network and a resultant
broadcast storm.
MPLS-TP ring MRPS protects MPLS services on a ring network.

protection The NEs on the ring network connect to each
switching (MRPS) other through their east and west ports. When the
working channel fails, the pre-established
protection channel takes over to transmit services.
CES Packet-based linear The packet-based linear MSP scheme is

MSP applicable to a point-to-point physical network,
providing MS-layer protection for the service
between two points.

Product Description 7 Functions and Features in TDM Mode
7 Functions and Features in TDM Mode
About This Chapter
The equipment has many functions and features.
7.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
7.2 Services
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.
The OptiX OSN equipment provides several equipment level protection schemes.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports several network level protection schemes.
7.5 Data Features
The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, and SAN/Video
features.
7.6 DDN Features
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN
equipment, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
7.7 PCM Features
After pulse code modulation (PCM) boards are configured for OptiX OSN equipment on
SDH networks, the SDH networks can receive/transmit and schedule PCM services.
7.8 ASON Features
The ASON software developed by Huawei applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using
this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN
product series support the ASON features.
7.9 Board REG Function
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the REG function.

7.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
7.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Capacity

Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
Table 7-1 lists the cross-connect boards and the corresponding cross-connect capacities
supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 7-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Higher Lower Order Access
Order Cross- Capacity of
Cross- Connect a Single
Connect Capacity Subrack
Capacity
N1PSXCS, N2PSXCSA, N3PSXCSA, 200 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 155 Gbit/s

N1SXCSA (1280x1280 (128x128 (992x992
VC-4s) VC-4s, which VC-4s)
are equivalent
to 384x384
VC-3s or
8064x8064
VC-12s)
N1IXCSA 200 Gbit/s 40 Gbit/s 155 Gbit/s

(1280x1280 (256x256 (992x992
VC-4s) VC-4s, which VC-4s)
are equivalent
to 768x768
VC-3s or
16128x16128
VC-12s)
7.1.2 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode

This section describes the access capacity of each slot on the equipment.
Figure 7-1 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Figure 7-1 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5Gbit/s or GSCC
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
XCS
XCS
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
GSCC
7.2 Services
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.
7.2.1 Service Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following types of services: SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR,
ATM, DDN, PCM, and SAN/Video services.
For details about supported service types, see Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Service types that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
Service Type Description
SDH services l Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64

l Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-8c/
VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c/AU-3
l Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X≤8),
VC-3-Xv (X≤24), VC-12-Xv (X≤63)
l SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s

Service Type Description
PDH services l E1 (optical) service

l E1 (electrical)/T1 service
l E3/T3 service
l E4 service
NOTE
With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing and
demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.
Ethernet services l Ethernet private line (EPL) service

l Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
l Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
l Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
RPR services l EVPL service

l EVPLAN service
ATM services l Constant bit rate (CBR) service

l Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
l Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
l Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
DDN services l Nx64 kbit/s (N = 1-31) service

l Framed E1 service
Pulse code l Z interface extension service

modulation (PCM) l Hotline service
services
l 2/4 wire audio and E&M service
l G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional service
Sub-rate services l Synchronous/asynchronous: 0.6kbit/s, 1.2Kbit/s, 2.4kbit/s,

4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 48kbit/s services
l Synchronous: 56kbit/s service
SAN services l Fiber channel (FC) service

l Fiber connection (FICON) service
l Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service
Video services l Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-

ASI) service
l High definition-serial digital interface (HD-SDI) electrical
service
l Standard definition-serial digital interface (SD-SDI) electrical
service

7.2.2 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other
service interfaces.
Interface Types
Table 7-3 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 7-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Interface Description
SDH service l STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors

interface l STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
l STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
l STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je,
V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
l STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
l STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b,
Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b, P1L1-2D2
l STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e
l CWDM colored optical interfaces: 40 km, 70 km, 80 km
l DWDM colored optical interfaces: 40 km, 80 km, 120 km, 170 km,
and 640 km
l STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.
692 can output fixed wavelengths from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz,
and can be directly interconnected with the WDM equipment.
PDH service l E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors

interface l T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
l E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
l E1 optical interfaces: I-2M
Ethernet service l 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

interface l 100BASE-FX/LX/VX/ZX
l 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
l 10GBASE-LW/LR
DDN service RS-449, RS-530, RS-530A, V.35, V.24, X.21, and Framed E1
interface interfaces
ATM service l STM-1 optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
interface l STM-4 optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
l E3 interfaces: E3 services are received by the N1PD3/N1PL3/
N1PL3A board.
l E1 IMA interfaces: E1 IMA services are received by the N1PQ1/
N1PQM/N2PQ1 board.

Interface Description
Pulse code l 2/4 wire audio and E&M

modulation l FXS/FXO
(PCM) service
interface l G.703 64kbit/s codirectional service interface: Co64K
Sub-rate service RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, V.35, X.21, and V.24

interface
SAN/Video l Optical interfaces: FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI

service interface l SMB electrical interfaces: DVB-ASI, HD-SDI, SD-SDI
OTU3 optical 40GBASE-LR4 (10 km), 40GBASE-ER4 (40 km), and 40GBASE-
interface ZR4(80 km)
NOTE
l Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, I-2M, and
Ve-4.2 are optical technical specifications defined by Huawei.
l Some optical interfaces on OptiX OSN equipment support single-fiber bidirectional optical modules,
on which one optical fiber can receive and transmit optical signals simultaneously, saving many
optical fiber resources. Different single-fiber bidirectional optical modules support different receive
and transmit wavelengths. The same type of single-fiber bidirectional optical modules must be used
on two interconnected sites.
7.2.3 Service Receiving Capacity

The capacities of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can receive vary according to the type
and quantity of the configured boards.
Table 7-4 lists the maximum capacities of different services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can
receive. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services when a single
subrack receives only this specific type of service.
Table 7-4 Service receiving capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 in TDM mode
Supported by a Single Subrack
STM-64 standard or concatenated services 12
STM-64 (FEC) services 12
STM-16 (FEC) services 8
STM-16 (EFEC) services 8
STM-1 standard services 224
STM-1 (electrical) services 132


Supported by a Single Subrack
E4 services 32
E3/T3 services 117
E1 (electrical) services 504
E1 (optical) services 112
T1 services 504
FE services 180
GE services 56
10GE services 16
ATM (STM-1) services 60
ATM (STM-4) services 15
Nx64 kbit/s services (N: 1-31) 64
Framed E1 services 64
ESCON services 56
FICON/FC100 services 22
FC200 services 8
DVB-ASI (optical) services 56
DVB-ASI (electrical) services 56
HD-SDI (electrical) services 44
SD-SDI (electrical) services 56
FXS/FXO services 180
2/4-wire audio, E&M services 90
Sub-rate services 96
G.703 64kbit/s codirectional services 64
OTU3 services 2

The OptiX OSN equipment provides several equipment level protection schemes.
Table 7-5 shows the equipment level protection supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 7-5 Equipment level protection

Object Protection Description
Protected Scheme
Ethernet BPS BPS, a board-level 1+1 protection scheme, is used to

(in TDM protect services on an entire Ethernet board. When the
mode) working board fails, BPS enables services to be
switched from the working board to the protection
board in a customer-accepted period.
PPS PPS, a port-level 1+1 protection scheme, is used to

protect services on specific ports. When the working
port fails, PPS enables services to be switched from the
working port to the protection port in a customer-
accepted period.
LAG In an LAG, multiple links attached to the same

equipment are aggregated to work as a logical link.
This helps increase bandwidth and link availability.
DLAG A DLAG is a protection group that aggregates two

corresponding ports on two boards of the same type. It
provides 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
Others TPS protection Tributary protection switching (TPS) enhances service

reliability in a TPS protection group. When TPS
detects a faulty working service board, it rapidly
switches services to the protection service board.
1+1 protection for The OptiX OSN equipment supports board-level 1+1
ATM boards protection with some ATM boards.
l Slots for working and protection boards:
Configured as required.
– A manual switching command is issued.
– The power supply of the working board fails.
– The clock of the working board fails.
l Revertive mode: Non-revertive.
l Switching time: ≤ 50 ms


Protected Scheme
1+1 hot backup for For the OptiX OSN equipment, the cross-connect and
the cross-connect timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and
and timing board timing board. The cross-connect and timing board
adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-
connect and timing units are protected.
l Slots for working and protection boards: Slot 9 and
slot 10
– The working board is cold reset.
l Revertive mode: Non-revertive. After successful
switching, the original protection board becomes
the working board. After the original working board
is recovered, the current working board continues to
be the original protection board.
1+1 hot backup for The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot
the SCC unit backup mechanism. When the active GSCC is working,
the standby GSCC is in the protection state.
l Slots for working and protection boards: Sot 18 and
slot 17
– The working board is under a hot reset.
l Revertive mode: Non-revertive. After successful
switching, the original protection board becomes
the working board, and the original working board
becomes the protection board.


Protected Scheme
Protection for the The OptiX OSN equipment supports two types of
wavelength N1LWX (arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion
conversion unit unit):
l Dual-fed and selective-receiving N1LWX: supports
intra-board protection. One board can implement
optical channel protection.
l Single-fed and single-receiving N1LWX: supports
inter-board protection, to be specific, 1+1 hot
backup protection.
l Slots for working and protection boards:
Configured as required.
l Revertive mode: Non-revertive.
l Switching time: ≤ 50 ms
1+1 hot backup for The OptiX OSN equipment can access two -48/-60 V
the power interface DC power supplies by using two PIU boards. These
unit two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each
other. When either of them fails, the other power
supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of
the equipment.
If the voltage of the two external power supplies of the
equipment is the same, the two PIU boards of mutual
backup separately share half of the current.
If the voltage offset value of the two external power
supplies of the equipment is more than 0.7 V, all the
current pass the PIU board of the external power
supply that has high voltage, and no current pass the
PIU board of the external power supply that has low
voltage. When only one PIU board is working, the
power supply of the subrack is not affected.
NOTE
If different boards are configured, the total power
consumption and current of the equipment are different, and
the current value of the PIU boards is also different. The
current values of the PIU boards are computed according to
the actual configuration.
1:N protection for The OptiX OSN equipment provides reliable power
the +3.3 V power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards by
of the board using the power backup unit on the AUX board. When
the power supply of a board fails, the backup power
supply immediately provides backup to ensure the
normal operation of the board.


Protected Scheme
Intelligent fan The OptiX OSN equipment uses three intelligent fan
modules to realize heat dissipation. The power supplies
of the three fan modules are of mutual backup. The
intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent
speed regulation and failure detection. When one fan
module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate
at the full speed. The running status of the fans is
indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front
panel of the fan module.
Board protection The board protection modes under abnormal conditions

modes under include resumable upload (protection against power
abnormal down during software uploading), undervoltage
conditions protection and overvoltage protection, and over-
temperature alarms.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading
The verification function is provided for applications
and data. After software loading is interrupted, the
basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any
applications or data that are not successfully or
completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the
loading to be resumed, until the software is
successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power
Supply
The power board provides a lightning protection
component to effectively avoid the damage that may be
caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board
automatically resets its CPU so that the software can
re-initialize the chip.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system
also automatically turns off the power supply on the
main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection
Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for
example, the cross-connect and timing board) that
generates a large amount of heat. When the board
detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to
prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the
fans.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN equipment supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types.


The OptiX OSN equipment supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 7-6 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 7-6 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Level Scheme
Protection
SDH Linear MSP The Linear Multiplex Section Protection (LMSP)

protection scheme is applicable to a point-to-point physical
network, providing MS-layer protection for the service
between two points. The OptiX OSN equipment
supports 1+1 and 1:N LMSP.
MSP ring The multiplex section protection ring (MSP ring)

scheme provides MS-level protection for services
between nodes on a ring network. The OptiX OSN
equipment supports three types of MSP ring: two-fiber
unidirectional MSP, two-fiber bidirectional MSP, and
four-fiber bidirectional MSP.
l SNCP l The SNCP scheme protects the service that is across

l E1 SNCP subnets. The SNCP is based on the dual fed and
selective receiving mechanism. The subnet can be a
l SNCMP chain, a ring, or a more complex network.
l SNCTP l E1 SNCP is a protection scheme that allows dual
transmission and selective reception of pulse code
modulation (PCM) services.
l The SNCMP scheme provides functions similar to
the SNCP scheme. With regard to their difference,
the SNCP scheme provides 1+1 protection and the
SNCMP scheme provides N+1 protection (in which
multiple protection paths protect one working path).
l The SNCTP scheme provides protection paths at the
VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all its
services can be switched to the protection path.
Dual-node The DNI network topology protection scheme

interconnection effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring
(DNI) protection services. The DNI realizes the protection of services
between two rings, which are networked by the
equipment from different vendors and adopt different
protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the
case of fiber failure and node failure.


Level Scheme
Protection
Fiber-shared When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used,

virtual trail an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical
protection channel is logically divided into several lower order or
higher order channels. These channels are then
connected to other links at the channel layer to form
rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer,
protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-
protection can be set accordingly.
Optical-path- In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical

shared MSP interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups,
so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and
optical interface.
Ethernet LPT As a protection scheme based on links, LPT enables

protection the pass-through of the states of the point-to-point link
and point-to-multipoint link. In this manner, LPT
realizes the network level protection for the
transmission of point-to-point private line services and
for the transmission of the point-to-multipoint
convergence services.
LCAS The LCAS function can be used to dynamically adjust

the bandwidth and protect virtual concatenation,
whereby making the network more robust and flexible.
STP/RSTP The STP and RSTP are used in the loop network. The
two protocols realize routing redundancy by adopting
certain algorithms and break the loop network into a
loop-free tree network, thus preventing packets from
increasing and cycling in an endless manner in the loop
network. In this manner, the application of the two
protocols can prevent the occurrence of the broadcast
storm and MAC address table flapping.
The RSTP is an optimized version of the STP and
implements all the functions of the STP. With the
application of the RSTP, the network convergence is
quicker. In addition, in the case of a link failure, the
blocked ports can be enabled to restore services
quickly.
MSTP Like Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP) is used to prevent loops on a
network and a resultant broadcast storm.


Level Scheme
Protection
ERPS Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, the

Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) uses the
ETH OAM function and the ring automatic protection
switching (R-APS) protocol to achieve fast protection
switching on the Ethernet ring network.
RPR Resilient packet ring (RPR) is an emerging Layer 2

link technology that integrates the multi-protocol label
switching (MPLS) and virtual metropolitan area
network (VMAN) technologies. RPR has a fixed point-
to-multipoint architecture, provides the statistical
multiplexing function, realizes fairness sharing of
bandwidths, accesses large granularities, and features
high-efficient bandwidth utilization.
ATM VP-Ring/VC- The OptiX OSN equipment provides protection for

protection Ring protection virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs), and
protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective
receiving mechanism.
7.5 Data Features

The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, and SAN/Video
features.
7.5.1 Ethernet Features

The OptiX OSN equipment has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH
transmission platform.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l EPL Service
l EVPL Service
l EPLAN Service
l EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As
shown in Figure 7-2, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination
node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the
SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.

Figure 7-2 EPL service based on port

B B
PORT2 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 PORT2
PORT1 VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK 1 POTR1
A A
NE 1 NE 2
OptiX OSN Enterprise

equipment user
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a
bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 7-3, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according
to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Company A. The
two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Figure 7-3 Port-shared EVPL services

Headquarters of Department 1
company A
VCTRUNK1 VLAN100
VLAN100 PORT1
VCTRUNK2 VLAN200
VLAN200
PORT1 PORT2
Department 2
NE 1 NE 2
OptiX OSN Enterprise

equipment user
l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN equipment adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
– EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 7-4.
– EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 7-5.
– EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-4 EVPL service based on VLAN ID

B B'
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK
VLAN100 VLAN100
A
PORT 1 PORT2 PORT2 PORT 1 A'
NE 1 NE 2
Cyber cafe OptiX OSN

Community
user equipment
user
Figure 7-5 EVPL service based on MPLS

Add label Strip label
PE P P PE
PORT2 PORT2 Department B

Department B
`
VCTRUNK1
Department
Department A
A PORT1 PORT1
NE 1 NE 2
Branch 1 Branch 2
OptiX OSN
Company A
equipment
Figure 7-6 EVPL service based on QinQ

Add label Strip label
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Department PORT2 PORT2 Department

B B
VCTRUNK1 `
Department Department
A PORT1 PORT1 A
NE 1 NE 2
Branch 1 Branch 2
Company A OptiX OSN

equipment

EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a
bandwidth, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2
switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access
control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets
are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as
shown in Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7 EPLAN service
PORT1
VB VCTRUNK1
Port 1
NE3
1
Department 3 of
company A
VCTRUNK2
VB PORT1
PORT1 VB
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
Port 1 Port 1
NE 1 NE 2
Department 1 of Department 2 of
company A company A
Access OptiX OSN
Company A
point equipment
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same
VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are
accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can
meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 7-8, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN equipment adopt
VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.

Figure 7-8 EVPLAN service
PORT2
PORT1
Department 3
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
of company B
VB
C-Aware
Department 3
S-Aware S-Aware
of company A Port 1
NE3
Port 2
VCTRUNK1
S-Aware
VCTRUNK2
C-Aware
S-Aware
PORT2 VB PORT2
PORT1 LSP LSP VB PORT1
C-Aware
NE 1 NE 2
Port 2 Port 1
Port 1 Port 2
Department 2
of company B
Department 1 Department 2
of company A Department 1 of company A
of company B
Acess OptiX OSN

Company A Company B
point equipment
7.5.2 RPR Features

The RPR of the OptiX OSN 3500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly
recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
l Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time.
l Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.
l Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node.
l Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
l Provide RPR protection.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in
reverse directions, as shown in Figure 7-9. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data
packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control
packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control
packets on the outer ring carry the control information on the inner ring. The two rings protect
each other.

Figure 7-9 RPR ring

Node 1
Outer ring data

Outer ring control
Node 2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4
Inner ring data

Inner ring control
Node 3
7.5.3 ATM Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not
support ABR services.
l The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation
services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth
and latency.
l The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.
l The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.
l The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF
RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 ATM service types and traffic types

No. Traffic Type Service Parameter
Type
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None
2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr

No. Traffic Type Service Parameter

Type
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services

When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service
processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs,
only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case,
each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM
services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 7-10, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a
VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4
bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three
services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output
through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.

Figure 7-10 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
DSLAM
34M ATM
Traffic
Service
Convergence
NE 1
155M ATM 2.5 Gbit/s SDH

622M ATM
Traffic Ring Traffic
NE 2 NE 4
Router
DSLAM
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for
ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv)
path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 7-11, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it
to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after
the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2
accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching
and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2
for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream
are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at
NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.

Figure 7-11 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
DSLAM
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to
the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring 34M ATM
after converged with local service. NE 1 Traffic
155M ATM
Traffic NE 4
Router
VC4-Xv
VP/VC-Ring
NE 2 622M ATM
DSLAM Traffic
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Application of IMA Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM
integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are
multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the
E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service
types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently
transmitted.
Figure 7-12 illustrates the IMA service networking.

Figure 7-12 IMA service networking

RNC
NE1
U2000
40km
25km
NE2 NE4
NodeB 1 STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP
ring
NodeB 4
35km 30km
NE3
NodeB 2
NodeB 3
7.5.4 SAN/Video Features

The OptiX OSN equipment provides the MST4 and VST4 boards to receive and transmit
SAN/video services transparently.
Table 7-8 and Table 7-9 provide the functions and features of the MST4.
Table 7-8 Functions and features of the MST4

Function and MST4
Feature
Basic functions Provides four independent ports to transmit/receive multiple services.

Supports the transparent transmission of the SAN and Video services.
Connector type LC
Optical module SFP

type
Service types l Supports FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, and DVB-ASI services.

Table 2 describes types and rates of the services.
l Transmits/Receives four-channel FC services (FC100/FICON and
FC200) at the same time, and the total bandwidth is less than 2.5
Gbit/s.
l Supports the full-rate transmission of FC services (one-channel
FC200 services or two-channel FC100 services).
l Transmits/Receives four-channel ESCON or DVB-ASI services, and
the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.

Function and MST4

Feature
Distance The first and second ports support the distance extension function on the
extension SDH side.
l FC100 services: 3000 km
l FC200 services: 1500 km
Maximum 2.5 Gbit/s

uplink The backplane provides four 622 Mbit/s buses that are directly
bandwidth connected to the cross-connect unit.
The MST4 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
Mapping Supports the VC-4-Xc (X = 4, 8, or 16) granularity.

granularity
ESCON Transmits/Receives four-channel ESCON services, and the total

services bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.
DVB-ASI Transmits/Receives four-channel DVB-ASI services, and the total

services bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.
Encapsulation Supports the GFP-T protocol, which complies with ITU-T G.7041.
format
Maintenance Supports inloops and outloops on ports on the customer side, which can
features be used to locate faults quickly.
Supports port-based RMON performance management.
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be used to
performance locate faults and maintain the equipment.
events Supports FC performance measurement only when FC100/FC200
distance extension is enabled.
Table 7-9 Service types and service rates supported by the MST4
Service Type Rate Remarks
FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service
FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service
ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service
Table 7-10 and Table 7-11 provide the functions and features of the VST4.

Table 7-10 Functions and features of the VST4

Function and VST4
Feature
Basic functions Provides four independent ports to transmit/receive services; supports

the transparent transmission of four-channel video services.
Interface type SMB (SMB interfaces can be converted into BNC interfaces by means
of transit cables.)
Service types Supports DVB-ASI, SD-SDI, and HD-SDI services. Table 2 describes
types and rates of the services.
Maximum l When a VST4 board is installed in any slot of slots 1-4 and 15-16,
upstream the maximum upstream bandwidth is 5 Gbit/s. A VST4 board can
bandwidth adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
l When a VST4 board is installed in any slot of slots 5-8 and 11-14,
the maximum upstream bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s. A VST4 board can
adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
Concatenation VC-4-Xc (X=4 or 16)

granularity
DVB-ASI Transmits/Receives four-channel DVB-ASI services.
SD-SDI Transmits/Receives four-channel SD-SDI services.
HD-SDI l When a VST4 is installed in any slot of slots 1-4 and 15-16, it
transmits/receives two-channel HD-SDI services. The VST4 can
l When a VST4 is installed in any slot of slots 5-8 and 11-14, it
transmits/receives four-channel HD-SDI services. The VST4 can
Encapsulation Supports the GFP-T protocol, which complies with ITU-T G.7041.
format
Maintenance Supports inloops and outloops on electrical ports for locating faults
features quickly.
Supports port-based RMON performance management.
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be used to
performance locate faults and maintain the equipment.
events
Table 7-11 Service types and service rates supported by the VST4
Service Type Rate Remarks
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service
SD-SDI 270 Mbit/s Video service
HD-SDI 1.485 Gbit/s Video service

7.6 DDN Features

When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN
equipment, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
Application of DDN Services (Nx64 kbit/s Service and Framed E1 Service)

The Nx64 kbit/s services and framed E1 services are mainly used for the following functions,
so various services can be accessed to a transmission network.
l Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers

l Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
l Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
l Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The Nx64 kbit/s services and framed E1 services are applicable to DDN private networks for
small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security
service halls.
As shown in Figure 7-13, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be

performed between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point
transmission of framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and branches
of Company B. The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1 services of Company
B can also be transmitted in hybrid mode over the SDH network.
Figure 7-13 DDN services (Nx64 kbit/s service and framed E1 service) networking and
application
NE1
Branch of 4 x 64k Headquarters

company A 4 x 64k of company A
NE2 NE4
Branch of Framed E1 Headquarters

company B Framed E1
of company B
NE3
OptiX NE Enterprise user
7.7 PCM Features

After pulse code modulation (PCM) boards are configured for OptiX OSN equipment on
SDH networks, the SDH networks can receive/transmit and schedule PCM services.

7.7.1 Introduction
This section describes the background of introducing scenarios of pulse code modulation
(PCM).
PCM devices convert analog signals into digital signals. Currently, PCM devices are
separated from SDH devices, which brings about the following problems:
l A large quantity of devices occupies much space of an equipment room.
l Network connections are complex.
l Devices are difficult to uniformly maintain and manage.
Figure 7-14 PCM devices are separated from SDH devices solution
Telephone
Telephone
Fax machine
Fax machine
SDH
network
Computer
Computer
PCM SDH SDH PCM
device device device device
Switch
Switch
To resolve the preceding problems, OptiX OSN equipment provides the embedded PCM
solution. Specifically, PCM boards are used on OptiX OSN equipment to provide foreign
exchange station (FXS) ports, foreign exchange office (FXO) ports, 2- or 4-wire audio and
exchange and multiplex signaling (E&M) ports, and sub-rate ports. Using these ports, OptiX
OSN equipment can receive low speed circuit services and transparently transmit them on
SDH networks. In addition, the services can be configured and managed on the NMS.

Figure 7-15 The embedded PCM solution

Telephone
Telephone
Fax machine
Fax machine
SDH
network
Computer
Computer
OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN
equipment
Switch equipment
Switch
OptiX OSN equipment with PCM boards
7.7.2 Application Scenarios-FXS/FXO

This section describes the FXS/FXO application scenarios of the built-in PCM technology.
Z interface extension services

An FXS port and an FXO port are used in pairs to transparently transmit telephone data. In
private network applications, an analog telephone connected to a PBX sometimes needs to be
extended to another place. This requirement can be well addressed by Z interface extension
services.
Telephones can be directly connected to a private branch exchange (PBX). OptiX OSN
equipment with FXS and FXO ports can be deployed between the telephones and PBX to
extend telephone lines. Each voice service occupies one 64 kbit/s channel of an E1.
Figure 7-16 Z interface extension service application

FXO FXO
FXO STM-N FXS
FXS
64 kbit/s /E1/E3/E4 64 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
PBX
FXO OptiX OSN OptiX OSN FXO
equipment equipment
PCM board
SDH line board/PDH tributary board

Hotline services
FXS ports are used in pairs to transmit private telephone data.
Hotline services, also called driving telephone services between stations, are the second
largest services in the railway scheduling system (the first largest services are party-line
services). Hotline services are used for point-to-point voice communication between adjacent
stations and can be connected upon off-hook without dialing.
Figure 7-17 Hotline service application

FXS STM-N FXS
FXO /E1/E3/E4 FXO
64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

equipment equipment
PCM board
7.7.3 Application Scenarios-2- or 4-wire audio and E&M

This section describes the 2- or 4-wire audio and E&M application scenarios of the built-in
PCM technology.
As networks develop, a local PBX needs to be connected to a private network through
transport devices, and private networks at different places need to be connected. A 2- or 4-
wire audio and E&M port can transparently transmit 2- or 4-wire audio services and E&M
signaling, and therefore OptiX OSN equipment can receive private network services.
2- or 4-wire audio and E&M trunk

OptiX OSN equipment is connected to PBXs using 2- or 4-wire audio and E&M ports. E&M
channels transmit signaling, while 2- or 4-wire audio channels transmit audio services. OptiX
OSN equipment functions as a trunk for the signaling and audio services.
Figure 7-18 2- or 4-wire audio and E&M trunk

2- or 4-wire 2- or 4-wire
audio E&M audio E&M
STM-N
64 kbit/s /E1/E3/E4 64 kbit/s
64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s
PBX PBX
(with E&M trunk) OptiX OSN OptiX OSN (with E&M trunk)
equipment equipment
PCM board

NOTE
If a user terminal is a data device such as modem, OptiX OSN equipment does not need to process signaling,
but only transmits audio services over 2- or 4-wire audio channels.
Point-to-point control signal transmission

If only an E&M channel is available, the E&M channel transmits only one channel of
connectivity signals. It applies to scenarios where control signals are remotely transmitted to
implement remote control. For example, a control center remotely turns on or turns off a radar
antenna and conducts air-ground communication using a sub-rate port in the same way as
intercoms.
Figure 7-19 Point-to-point control signal transmission
E&M STM-N E&M

/E1/E3/E4
Control 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s
Controller
center
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

equipment equipment
PCM board
2- or 4-wire audio signal transmission

If a 2- or 4-wire audio line is used independently, it transmits only one channel of audio
signals. It is usually used on an audio terminal to transmit audio signals.
Figure 7-20 2- or 4-wire audio signal transmission
2- or 4- 2- or 4-wire
wire audio STM-N audio
/E1/E3/E4
Audio 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s Audio
terminal terminal
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

equipment equipment
PCM board

7.7.4 Application Scenarios-Sub-rate

This section describes the sub-rate application scenarios of the built-in PCM technology.
Sub-rate (X.50 D3-based encapsulation)

Sub-rate (X.50 D3-based encapsulation) services are used for synchronization between
narrowband devices and transmission of asynchronous data services, at a rate ranging from
0.6 kbit/s to 48 kbit/s.
Figure 7-21 Sub-rate (X.50 D3-based encapsulation)

Sub-rate port Sub-rate port
X.50 D3-based STM-N X.50 D3-based
Sub-rate encapsulation /E1/E3/E4 encapsulation Sub-rate
Device A Device B
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

equipment equipment
PCM board
Sub-rate (V.110-based encapsulation)

Sub-rate (V.110-based encapsulation) services are used for synchronization between
narrowband devices and transmission of asynchronous data services, at a rate ranging from
0.6 kbit/s to 56 kbit/s.
NOTE
l When a 64 kbit/s timeslot carries only one channel of sub-rate service, the service can exclusively occupy
the timeslot.
l When a 64 kbit/s timeslot carries multiple channels of sub-rate services, these services can share the
timeslot.
Figure 7-22 Sub-rate (V.110-based encapsulation)
Sub-rate Sub-rate
Sub-rate port Sub-rate port
device A device A
STM-N
V.110-based /E1/E3/E4 V.110-based
encapsulation encapsulation
64 kbit/s
Sub-rate timeslot Sub-rate
device B OptiX OSN shared OptiX OSN device B
equipment equipment
PCM board

7.7.5 Application Scenarios-G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional service

This section describes the G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional service application scenarios of the
built-in PCM technology.
G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional services transmit baseband digital services over PCM channels
by fully utilizing standard 64 kbit/s speech channel resources. This type of service is
commonly used in the dedicated communication networks for electricity and railway
transportation.
Figure 7-23 G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional service scenario

G.703 64 kbit/s G.703 64 kbit/s
codirectional service STM-N codirectional service
Relay /E1/E3/E4 Relay
protection 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s protection
and control and control
device device
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
device device
PCM board 64 kbit/s service signals

SDH line board
Timing signals
/PDH tributary board
7.7.6 Application Scenarios-Conference

This section describes the conference application scenarios of the built-in PCM technology.
The purpose of using PCM in the conference scenario is to implement communication
between the master and slave devices and protection between slave devices. As shown in the
following figure:
l A conference group is configured on the OptiX OSN 1500.
l Slave devices back up each other and can exchange running status information.
l The active and standby service networks on slave devices back up each other and can
exchange running status information.
l The service from a slave device to the master device is a point-to-point service.
l The service from the master device to slave devices is a point-to-multipoint broadcast
service.

Figure 7-24 Conference scenario

Active network
Slave-1 (active)
2 Mbit/s 2.4-48 kbit/s

Sub-rate
port
Slave-2 (standby)
2.4-48 kbit/s
Master STM-N
Slave-3 (standby)
OptiX OSN 1500
2 Mbit/s 2.4-48 kbit/s
Slave-4 (standby)
Standby network
DX1 board Valid service signals on the Slave ->Master path
PDH tributary board Invalid service signals on the Slave ->Master path
SDH line board Valid service signals on the Master ->Slave path
7.7.7 Application Scenarios-Multiplexer Group

This section describes the multiplexer group application scenarios of the built-in PCM
technology.
Data-P2MP
In the Data-P2MP scenario, a multiplexer group is configured on the OptiX OSN equipment
to implement communication between the master and slave devices. See Figure 7-25.
l Master —> slave: The master device broadcasts services to all the slave devices in the
same group through the multiplexer group.
l Slave —> master: Only the data of one slave device is valid in the multiplexer group.
The muted slave devices transmit all 1s to DX1 boards. The multiplexer group performs
a logical AND operation on the data of all slave devices and sends the operation result to
the master device.
NOTE
Only the data of slave-1 is valid. Slave-2 and slave-3 are muted and transmit all 1s to DX1 boards. The
multiplexer group performs a logical AND operation on the data of slave-1, slave-2, and slave-3 and
sends the operation result to the master device.

Figure 7-25 Data-P2MP scenario
Slave-1
Master Slave-2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Slave-3
Slave-1
Master Slave-2
Slave-3
Multiplexer
group
Slave-1
Master AND Slave-2
Slave-3
Valid service signals from a slave

device to the master device
DX1 board
Invalid service signals from a slave
SDH line board Valid service signals from the
master device to a slave device

Data-Meeting
In the Data-Meeting scenario, a multiplexer group is configured on the OptiX OSN equipment
to implement equivalent data communication between members. All members in a Data-
Meeting group are of equivalence relationships. See Figure 7-26.
l Each member broadcasts data to other members through the multiplexer group.
l Each member receives the data of other members after a logical AND operation is
performed on the data by the multiplexer group.
NOTE
Member-1 broadcasts data to member-2, member-3, and member-4 through the multiplexer group, and
receives the data of member-2, member-3, and member-4 after a logical ADN operation is performed on
the data by the multiplexer group. Similarly, member-2 broadcasts data to member-1, member-3, and
member-4 through the multiplexer group, and receives the data of member-1, member-3, and member-4
after a logical ADN operation is performed on the data by the multiplexer group. Member-3 and
member-4 may be deduced by analogy.

Figure 7-26 Data-Meeting scenario

OptiX OSN
equipment
Member-1 Member-4
Member-2 Member-3
Multiplexer
group Member-2
Member-1 AND Member-3
Member-4
Member-1
Member-4
Member-1
Member-4
Member-1
Member-3
DX1 board Transmit data signals
SDH line board Receive data signals

VF-P2MP
In the VF-P2MP scenario, a multiplexer group is configured on the OptiX OSN equipment to
implement audio transmission between the master and slave devices. See Figure 7-27.
l Master —> slave: The master device broadcasts audio signals to all the slave devices in
the same group through a multiplexer.
l Slave —> master: The audio signals of all slave devices are aggregated in the
multiplexer group. The master device selects the largest channel of audio signals.
NOTE
l The audio signals of slave-1, slave-2, and slave-3 are aggregated in the multiplexer group. The master
device selects the largest channel of audio signals.
l The signaling type of a VF-P2MP group is usually None.
l If the signaling type of a VF-P2MP group is not None, the VF-P2MP group broadcasts the signaling of
the master device to all slave devices. After a slave device receives busy signaling, the VF-P2MP group
sends busy signaling to the master device. Otherwise, the VF-P2MP group sends idle signaling to the
master device.

Figure 7-27 VF-P2MP scenario
Slave-1
MAX (Slave-1,
Slave-2, Slave-3)
Master Slave-2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Slave-3
Slave-1
Master Slave-2
Slave-3
Multiplexer
group
Slave-1
MAX (Slave-1,
Master Slave-2
Slave-2, Slave-3)
Slave-3
Valid service signals from a slave

PCM board
SDH line board Valid service signals from the
master device to a slave device

VF-Meeting
In the VF-Meeting scenario, a multiplexer group is configured on the OptiX OSN equipment
to implement equivalent audio transmission between members. All members in a VF-Meeting
group are of equivalence relationships. See Figure 7-28.
l Each member broadcasts audio signals to other members through the multiplexer group.
l Each member receives other members' audio signals that are mixed by the multiplexer
group.
NOTE
l Member-1 broadcasts audio signals to member-2, member-3, and member-4 through the multiplexer
group, and receives the audio signals of member-2, member-3, and member-4 after the signals are
mixed by the multiplexer group. Similarly, member-2 broadcasts audio signals to member-1,
member-3, and member-4 through the multiplexer group, and receives the audio signals of
member-1, member-3, and member-4 after the signals are mixed by the multiplexer group.
Member-3 and member-4 may be deduced by analogy.
l When the signaling of a member in a VF-Meeting group is idle, the member is muted. For the
detailed signaling scheme, see VF-Meeting Signaling Scheme.

Figure 7-28 VF-Meeting scenario

OptiX OSN equipment
Member-1 Member-4
Member-2 Member-3
Multiplexer Member-2
group
Audio
Member-1 Member-3
mixing
Member-4
Member-1
Audio
Member-2 Member-3
mixing
Member-4
Member-1
Audio
Member-3 Member-2
mixing
Member-4
Member-1
Audio
Member-4 Member-3
mixing
Member-4
PCM board Transmit audio signals
SDH line board Receive audio signals

7.8 ASON Features

The ASON software developed by Huawei applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using
this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN
product series support the ASON features.
For details, refer to ASON User Guide.
7.8.1 Background and Advantages

Compared with the SDH network, the transmission network that applies the new ASON
technology shows advantages in service configuration, bandwidth utilization and protection
schemes.
In recent years, the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) optical communication system has
been widely applied in telecommunication networks. It covers a variety of network layers,
including the backbone layer, metropolitan layer and access layer. With fast protection and
excellent management performance, it has become the main means of transmission for
telecommunications.
The ASON has been developed to solve these problems. This technology involves signaling
switching and a control plane to enhance its network connection management and recovery
capability. It supports end-to-end service configuration and the service level agreement
(SLA).
Characteristics of the ASON

Compared with the traditional SDH network, the ASON has the following characteristics:
l Configures end-to-end services automatically.

l Discovers the topology automatically.
l Provides mesh networking that enhances the survivability of the network.
l Supports different services which are provided with different levels of protection.
l Provides traffic engineering and dynamically adjusts the network logic topology in real
time to optimize the configuration of network resources.
Service Configuration
Traditional SDH networks are generally chains and rings. The trails and timeslots of their
services are manually configured ring by ring and point by point, which consumes a lot of
time and effort. As networks become increasingly large and complicated, this service
configuration mode cannot meet the rapidly increasing user demands.
The ASON successfully solves this problem by end-to-end service configuration. To

configure a service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth
requirement and protection type; the network automatically performs the required operations.
Bandwidth Utilization
Traditional SDH optical transmission networks have a large amount of resources reserved and
lack advanced service protection, and the restore and routing functions. In contrast, with the

routing function the ASON can provide protection by reserving fewer resources, therefore
increasing network resource utilization.
Protection and Restoration

Chain and ring are the main topologies used in a traditional SDH network. MSP and SNCP
are the main protection schemes for the services. In ASON, mesh is the main topology.
Besides MSP and SNCP protections, the dynamic restoring function is available to restore the
services dynamically. In addition, when there are multiple failures in a network, the services
can be restored as many as possible.
According to the difference in the service restoration time, multiple service types are defined
in ASON networks to meet different customer requirements.
7.8.2 Huawei ASON Solution

Huawei provides detailed ASON solutions for different layers.
ASON Network Application

The ASON solution provided by Huawei involves the following products:
l Control plane software: OptiX GCP or OptiX GSP

l Network management software: iManager U2000
l Equipment on the transport plane: OptiX OSN series equipment
Figure 7-29 illustrates the relationship among the preceding products.
Figure 7-29 Huawei ASON solution

U2000 Planning and simulation
Network management system
system
Control plane supported by

the OptiX GSP software
loaded on the OptiX OSN
equipment
ASON network
composed of the
OptiX OSN
equipment
With the increasingly large network scale and capacity, however, the access and convergence
layer will evolve into ASON. Huawei provides ASON products for each layer, as shown in
Figure 7-30. Table 7-12 lists the ASON products in each layer.

Table 7-12 OptiX OSN series products

ASON NE Applied at
OptiX OSN 9500 Backbone layer
OptiX OSN 7500 II Backbone layer
OptiX OSN 3500 Convergence layer
OptiX OSN 3500 II Convergence layer
OptiX OSN 2500 Access layer
OptiX OSN 1500 Access layer
Figure 7-30 Network solution

OptiX OSN 7500 II OptiX OSN 7500 OptiX OSN 9560
Backbone layer
Convergence layer
Access layer
GSM/CDMA/ PSTN Ethernet . . . ATM DDN

WCDMA
NOTICE
l When high-performance system control boards are used, it is recommended that each
ASON domain support a maximum of 150 NEs and the number of network-wide links be
less than 12,000. If a network contains more than 150 NEs, it is recommended that the
network be divided into ASON domains to facilitate management.
l The OptiX OSN 1500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 3500 II do not support high-
performance system control boards.

ASON Development
The concepts and standards of the ASON appears on the premise that the SDH fiber
transmission system is widely used. The reasonable introduction schemes and development
schemes are necessary. As the ASON concepts and standards continue to develop, and as
considerable SDH fiber transmission systems already exist, the introduction schemes and
development schemes become very important.
Two basic introduction schemes are described as follows.
l To create an ASON network

When the backbone network and MAN need to expand the capacity, you can consider
creating the ASON network.
l To upgrade a traditional SDH network to an ASON network
If Huawei OptiX OSN series products are deployed in the MAN and backbone network,
new software can be loaded to upgrade the network to an ASON network. This scheme
does not require new equipment and the network can be smoothly upgraded.
Interconnection between ASON and SDH:
l A great number of SDH networks are currently in service. Hence, for the development of
the ASON, the interconnection between ASON and SDH networks becomes a key factor.
l The ASON and SDH networks share the same service granularities such as VC-4, VC-3
and VC-12. Hence, the interconnection between ASON and SDH networks is not a
problem from the viewpoint of service.
l The ASON and SDH networks can be uniformly managed only if the equipment in the
network is the Huawei OptiX series equipment.
7.9 Board REG Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the REG function.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of ADM and REG. See Figure 7-31.
Figure 7-31 Hybrid application of ADM and REG

REG
SL64 SL64 SL64 SL64

IN OUT OUT IN
OSN OSN
3500 3500
OUT IN IN OUT
OptiX OSN 3500
IN OUT OUT IN
OSN OSN
3500 OUT IN IN OUT 3500
PQ1
SL16 SL16 SL16 SL16
ADM

Product Description 8 Synchronization
8 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN equipment supports multiple synchronization technologies.
Synchronization technologies
Table 8-1 lists the synchronization technologies supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 8-1 Synchronization technologies

Synchronization Description
Scheme
Physical Clocks Physical clock synchronization is a method of recovering clock

frequencies from physical signals.
IEEE 1588v2 Time The IEEE 1588v2 defines a Precision Clock Synchronization
Synchronization and Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems. It
Clock Synchronization defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) to synchronize
independent clocks running on separate nodes of a distributed
measurement and control system to a high degree of accuracy
and precision.
Synchronization involves clock synchronization (also called
frequency synchronization) or time synchronization. The IEEE
1588v2 standard mainly applicable to time synchronization, and
it can also be used for clock synchronization.
Synchronous Ethernet The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology of frequency

Clock synchronization over the physical layer. The system directly
extracts the clock signal from the serial bit stream on the
Ethernet line, and transmits the data to each board by using the
clock signal to realize the transfer of clock information.

Synchronization Description
Scheme
CES ACR CES ACR is a function that uses the adaptive clock recovery
(ACR) technology to recover clock synchronization information
carried by CES packets. In the standard CES ACR solution, the
source end (Master) considers the local clock as the timestamp
in the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packet header and
encapsulates it in the CES packet; the sink end (Slave) recovers
the clock according to the timestamp in the packet. In this
manner, signal impairment during the transmission is prevented.
Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks

Table 8-2 lists clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks based
on the wireless access mode.
Table 8-2 Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks

Wireless Access Requirements Requirements for Time
Standard for Frequency Synchronization Accuracy
Synchronization
Accuracy
GSM 0.05 ppm N/A
WCDMA 0.05 ppm N/A
TD-SCDMA 0.05 ppm ±1.5 us
CDMA2000 0.05 ppm ±3 us
LTE-FDD 0.05 ppm N/A
LTE- Cell Radius<=3 0.05 ppm ±1.5 us

TDD km, <=3 us
Cell Radius>3 ±5 us
km, <=10 us
LTE-A eMBMS/eICIC 0.05 ppm ±1.5 us
COMP Apply to CloudBB scenario without

requirement on MBB network.

Wireless Access Requirements Requirements for Time

Standard for Frequency Synchronization Accuracy
Synchronization
Accuracy
CA Downstream CA: ± 1.5 us.

Upstream CA: phase synchronization
requirements for antenna interfaces
between intra-station coordinating
cells are as follows:
l <130ns (intra-band contiguous)
l <260ns (intra-band non-
contiguous & inter-band)
Phase synchronization is not required
for equipment on the bearer network.
Inter-station upstream CA application
scenarios are few and are to be
studied.
Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems

Billing and network management systems also require phase synchronization. Table 8-3 lists
the phase synchronization requirements of some common systems.
Table 8-3 Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems

System Phase Synchronization Precision
Billing system 500 ms
Communication network management 500 ms

system
Signaling system No. 7 1 ms
Positioning system 1 us (equivalent to a positioning precision

of 300 m)

Product Description 9 Network Management Software
9 Network Management Software
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the network management system, inter-NE communication

management, and intra-NE communication management.
9.1 Network Management Software

The OptiX OSN equipment is uniformly managed by the transmission network management
system (NMS) and local craft terminal (LCT) through the ETH port. The OptiX OSN
equipment supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which allows a third-
party system to monitor the network. The time synchronization function on the NMS keeps
NE time and NMS time consistent.
9.2 DCN Management Scheme
The OptiX OSN equipment supports two DCN modes: outband data communication network
(DCN) and inband DCN.

9.1 Network Management Software

The OptiX OSN equipment is uniformly managed by the transmission network management
system (NMS) and local craft terminal (LCT) through the ETH port. The OptiX OSN
equipment supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which allows a third-
party system to monitor the network. The time synchronization function on the NMS keeps
NE time and NMS time consistent.
The NMS maintains the transmission network elements (NEs) on the entire network. The
NMS can implement end-to-end configurations for TDM and packet services.
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with ITU-T recommendations. The equipment adopts
the management information model and the object-oriented management technology. With the
NMS, the equipment can exchange information with the NE software through the
communication module to manage the alarms and performance events in a centralized
manner. In addition, the end-to-end configuration on the management plane can be realized.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the simple network management protocol (SNMPv2/
SNMPv3), which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from
different vendors.
NOTE
For contents that the third-party system monitored based on SNMP, consult field Huawei engineers.
The time synchronization function on the NMS allows NE time to be synchronized with NMS
time. This ensures that the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm or an abnormal
event occurs. The time synchronization function is available in the following modes:
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000
server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000
server time manually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time
of the workstation or computer where the U2000 server is located. This scheme features
easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to
time.
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the NTP server or synchronizing with the
standard NTP server, the NE time and the U2000 time are synchronized with the NTP
server time or the standard NTP server time automatically. The NTP server can be the
U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme enables the U2000 and NEs to have a
time accuracy of one nanosecond in theory, and applies to a network with high
requirement for time accuracy.
9.2 DCN Management Scheme

The OptiX OSN equipment supports two DCN modes: outband data communication network
(DCN) and inband DCN.
9.2.1 Outband DCN

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various outband DCN modes.
An outband DCN indicates that the other channels (excluding service channels) are used to
transmit the network management information, thus managing the network.

An outband DCN requires a dedicated communication channel and a maintenance channel

that is independent of the service channels. If the outband DCN mode is used, the network
management center can build a DCN network with the managed equipment through multiple
methods (for example, E1 private line or Ethernet). Then, the network management center can
manage the network under control.
Compared with an inband DCN, an outband DCN provides the management paths that are
more reliable. If any fault occurs on the service channels, the network management center can
obtain the network management information immediately and monitor the equipment in real
time.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following outband DCN networking technologies:
l HWECC
l IP over DCC
l OSI over DCC
Table 9-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500
DCC Allocation N4GSCC/N6GSCC
Channel type Supports the GCC0, D1-D1, D1-D3 and D4-D12 channel
types.
Operation Mode 1 Supports 160 D1-D3 channels.

mode
Mode 2 Supports 40 D1-D3 channels.
Supports 40 D4-D12 channels.








DCC Allocation N4GSCC/N6GSCC

Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols.
Default mode Mode 1
CAUTION
When interconnected with the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000), the OptiX OSN 3500 does not
support the D4-D12 channel type if the DCN networking runs the IP over DCC protocol.
Otherwise, communication is interrupted.
9.2.2 Inband DCN

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various inband DCN modes.
In TDM mode, the SDH and Ethernet services carried by the equipment uses the outband
DCN networking. In packet mode, the Ethernet services carried by the equipment uses the
inband DCN networking.
If the inband DCN mode is used, the network management information is transmitted on the
services channels of the equipment.
If the inband DCN mode is used, the network management information is encapsulated as
payload and is transmitted through the service channels without setting up a dedicated DCN
channel.
The inband DCN networking provides the feature of flexible networking and does not require
extra equipment.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following inband DCN networking technologies:
l HWECC
l IP
NOTE
By default, the inband DCN networking uses the IP technology.

Product Description 10 OAM
10 OAM
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN equipment provides enhanced maintenance and management functions.
10.1 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
10.2 Alarm and Performance Management
The OptiX OSN equipment supports alarm and performance management, and this can help
users locate and rectify faults quickly.
10.3 ALS Function And Optical Power Management
The OptiX OSN equipment supports in-service detection of optical power and provides he
automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
10.4 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance
The OptiX OSN equipment provides multiple maintenance methods. In this manner, users can
conveniently monitor and commission the equipment, and locate the fault on the equipment.
10.5 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade
The OptiX OSN equipment supports a network upgrade through board replacement or
software upgrade. The following part describes several key network upgrade methods.
10.6 License Management
A Huawei product license authorizes product use within a specified scope and a specified
period. With a Huawei product license, customers have access to the services committed by
Huawei.

10.1 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 10-1 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 10-1 Administration and auxiliary interfaces
Type of Description
Interface
Administratio Serial network management/management interface (OAM/F&f)

n interface Four broadcast data interfaces (S1-S4)
One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1)
One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management (ETH)
One serial interface for administration (F&f)
One interface used for communication with external boards (COM)
Orderwire One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)

interface Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1-V2)
Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two broadcast
data interfaces)
External clock Two 120-ohm clock input/output interfaces in 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz
interface clock mode
Two 75-ohm clock input interfaces and two clock output interfaces in
2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz clock mode
External time DCLS time input interface

interface DCLS time output interface
1PPS+TOD time information input interface
1PPS+TOD time information output interface
Alarm Four-output interface for the alarm indicators on the cabinet

interface Four-input cascading interface for the alarm indicators on the cabinet
Sixteen-input and four-output alarm interface
Four-output alarm cascading interface
NOTE
The external clock interface and external time interface are used together. The two interfaces cannot be
enabled at the same time.
10.2 Alarm and Performance Management

The OptiX OSN equipment supports alarm and performance management, and this can help
users locate and rectify faults quickly.

Alarm Management
l The system control board generates audible and visual alarms to instruct users to take
proper measures in the case of an emergency.
l The AUX board provides the 16-input external alarm port, 4-output alarm port, 4-output
port for cabinet alarm indicators, and one alarm cascading port to facilitate operation and
maintenance of the equipment.
l Each board provides running status indicators and alarm indicators to help users locate
and rectify faults quickly.
l The equipment supports alarm storm suppression. When more than 1860 alarms are
reported, the NE returns a message indicating that too many alarms are reported.
l The equipment supports the alarm cutoff function. You can mute an alarm by pressing
the specific button on the system control board or by using the NMS.
l The equipment supports automatic connectivity monitoring for optical fibers between
NEs. Once any fault is defected, alarms are reported automatically.
l The equipment supports the query of the working temperature of certain boards.
l When multiplex section protection (MSP) switching or tributary protection switching
(TPS) switching occurs, the equipment can retain the state of an alarm or a performance
event in the working path. This enables users to focus only on the service state.
Performance Management
l The OptiX OSN equipment can monitor and report various performance events to help
users monitor and manage the equipment.
l The OptiX OSN equipment can monitor and report various SDH performance events and
Ethernet performance events. SDH performance events include bit errors, jitters, and
pointer justifications caused by jitters. Ethernet performance events include counts of
transmitted and received packets and records of Ethernet service transmission quality.
l The equipment supports the setting of performance thresholds. By using this function,
users can focus on performance events indicating severe service degradation and ignore
performance events indicating normal changes.
l For 15-minute performance monitoring, the equipment can store a maximum of 16x15-
minute historical performance data, namely, performance data over 4 hours and 15
minutes. For 24-hour performance monitoring, the equipment can store a maximum of
6x24-hour historical performance data, namely, performance data over 6 days and 24
hours.
10.3 ALS Function And Optical Power Management

The OptiX OSN equipment supports in-service detection of optical power and provides he
automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN equipment provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the
SDH optical interfaces.
l When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at
the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of
the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the
laser pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time.

l After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the
laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite
end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by
the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser
beams. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the
R-LOS alarm is cleared.
The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function complies with ITU-T G.664.
Optical Power Management

l The OptiX OSN equipment supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH
optical interfaces and Ethernet optical interfaces.
l The OptiX OSN equipment provides the function to query the parameters of the optical
module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode
(single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate, and wavelength.
l The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-
mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which facilitates the
maintenance.
l The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
l The upper and lower thresholds of input optical power on packet Ethernet boards can be
set.
10.4 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance

The OptiX OSN equipment provides multiple maintenance methods. In this manner, users can
conveniently monitor and commission the equipment, and locate the fault on the equipment.
Fault Locating
l Certain tributary boards, line boards, and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test
and the remote bit error test.
l The OptiX OSN equipment provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This
function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this
function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel the
collection according to the requirement.
l The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities can be
traced to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities.
l The connectivity status of the services can be determined.
l The faulty node can be analyzed.
l The interworking function (IWF) is supported, which works with MPLS PW OAM to
help locate a fault and to trigger MPLS PW APS for service protection.
OAM
l Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect
faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
l MPLS OAM, MPLS-TP OAM, and ETH OAM are available.

NOTE
l MPLS OAM can be distributed or centralized. Distributed MPLS OAM can be switched to
centralized MPLS OAM, but not vice versa.
l MPLS OAM can coexist but not interconnect with MPLS-TP OAM.
l The enabling state of detecting the alarms in the MSP protection path can be queried.
l The PW OAM and Tunnel OAM function are supported. Different alarms are used to
detect the faults of working links.
Maintenance
l The OptiX OSN equipment provides the orderwire phone function for management
personnel at different sites to communicate with each other.
l The NMS can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms
of each set of equipment on a network.
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports the remote maintenance function. When the
equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network
to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN equipment system.
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports the hot swapping of the boards.
l The OptiX OSN equipment provides the board version replacement function. This helps
to replace the board of with the board of a later version. After the replacement, the
configuration and service status of the board of a later version are the same as the
configuration and service status of the board of the previous version.
l The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled.
After being inserted, the board does not work if the total power consumption of the
boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the equipment.
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports the query of the current status of the NE, board, and
port.
l The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted according to
the daylight saving time in the country.
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF). The
NSF function prevents data services from being interrupted upon a control-plane fault.
This function is implemented based on board warm resets and active/standby switching
between cross-connect boards or system control boards.
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports port mirroring. This function allows monitored
traffic to be mirrored to another idle port during online fault diagnosis and then be sent to
a dedicated analyzer.
– Mirroring does not affect services.
– The mirrored port and the idle port can be on the same board or different boards on
the same NE.
NOTE
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports only local port mirroring.

l Only NE users with Administrator User Group or higher rights can configure port mirroring.
l The OptiX OSN equipment supports disaster recovery for NE configuration data. This
function restores NE data using a configuration file downloaded from the NMS.
A traditional NE database backup may end up with a failure. Disaster recovery for NE
configuration data uses NMS configuration data as the data restoration source to rebuild
NE configuration database. This function applies to the following scenarios:

– An NE is down and its database needs to be rebuilt.

– A few services carried by an NE are interrupted. The NE cannot be configured and
there is no valid database backup file.
– Many services carried by an NE are interrupted. The NE cannot be configured, or
can be configured but the configuration process is too long. Furthermore, there is no
valid database backup file.
NOTICE
Disaster recovery for NE configuration data is highly risky and this operation must be
performed under the on-site guidance of a Huawei engineer. After an NE database on a
live network is damaged, conventional maintenance methods are preferred, such as
manual recovery and database restoration using a DC tool.
10.5 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade

The OptiX OSN equipment supports a network upgrade through board replacement or
software upgrade. The following part describes several key network upgrade methods.
10.5.1 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version
board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board
are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to Hardware
Description.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
l The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the
replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, If
the N2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be
replaced with the N1SL64 board.
l The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.
NOTICE
A board can support only the AU-3 services or TCM function.
10.5.2 Simulation Package Loading and Package Diffusion

The OptiX OSN equipment provides the functions of simulation package loading and
simulation package diffusion.

Simulation Package Loading

When you need to upload the whole set of the software to an NE, and the mapping between
the board and software is defined according to the format of the simulation software package,
you can use the simulation software package to improve the loading efficiency and upgrade
security, and reduce the operation complexity.
The simulation software package includes:
l All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE

l Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each software
The simulation software package loading has the following features:
l The user loads the software on an NE basis and through a uniform operation interface.
l The status of the NE does not affect the loading.
l A version rollback is supported for an upgrade failure.
Simulation Package Diffusion

When you use the simulation package simulation method, the simulation software package is
diffused and loaded to all NEs on a network. The diffusion protocol running on the NEs
ensures that the loading process is almost synchronous. As a result, package loading is more
efficient and less manual operations are required.
Simulation package diffusion has the following features:
l Level-by-level package diffusion and synchronous package loading on multiple NEs

l Load sharing
l Balanced utilization of network bandwidths
10.5.3 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a

new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old
codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new
requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
l The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
l The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents
frequent software version upgrade.
l The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot
patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to
avoid upgrade risks.
l The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves
the efficiency of solving problems.

10.5.4 Smooth Upgrade

Based on the increasing demands for packet services and stable requirements for conventional
TDM services, the OptiX OSN equipment supports a smooth upgrade from the TDM mode to
the packet mode.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following smooth upgrade schemes:
l Smooth upgrade through adding boards and software upgrade, without replacement of
the original equipment
l Smooth upgrade through replacement of the original cross-connect board with a dual-
mode cross-connect board, which can process the services in TDM mode and in packet
mode
l Smooth upgrade from the TDM version to the packet version, without replacement of the
cross-connect board.
10.6 License Management

A Huawei product license authorizes product use within a specified scope and a specified
period. With a Huawei product license, customers have access to the services committed by
Huawei.
License management includes version license management and feature license management.
OptiX OSN equipment supports feature license management.
NOTE
l A license physically refers to a license file.

l A license file is updated, loaded, or activated on the NMS.
l For licenses that need to be configured for your product, contact Huawei engineers.
l You can obtain license files from Huawei engineers, who are responsible for loading and updating
license files.
Table 10-2 Feature license information

License Name Function
License for a Set the service transmission capability of the smart line board per
smart line board 10Gbit/s (Per Unit).

Product Description 11 Security Management
11 Security Management
The product provides security mechanisms in software and hardware. These mechanisms
protect the system and data against security risks or ensure system and data stability and
reliability in case of attacks.
Overview of Hardware Security

The system reliability of the product reaches up to 99.999%, with the use of high-reliability
hardware design and redundancy design. This ensures that the system is immune to security
threats, and that the hardware system still runs smoothly and reliably under security threats.
Overview of Software Security

The product processes two categories of data: O&M data and service data. The data is
transmitted over independent logical and physical paths and does not affect each other.
Therefore, services on devices of the OSN equipment are processed in two planes:
l Management plane
The management plane provides access to the required equipment and management
functions, such as managing accounts and passwords, communication protocols, and
alarm reporting. The security feature of the management plane enables secure device
access, concentrated management, and thorough security audit.
l Data plane
The data plane processes service data that enters the devices and forwards service data
packets according to hardware forwarding entries. On one hand, the data plane prevents
user service packets from being intercepted, modified, or deleted, which endangers the
confidentiality and completeness of user data. On the other hand, the data plane ensures
the control of hardware forwarding actions, preventing forwarding entries from being
attacked or modified. In this manner, the forwarding plane of the devices can function
stably and reliably.
Table 11-1 lists the security functions that the product provides.

Table 11-1 Security functions of the two planes

Plane Function Description
Management Account and password Manages and saves device maintenance

plane management accounts.
Local authentication and Checks account validity and performs

authorization authorization.
Checks account validity and remotely

RADIUS authorization and performs authorization in the concentrated
authentication mode, reducing the maintenance cost.
Records actions about account

Security log management.
Operation log Records non-query operations.
Functions as a standard solution for saving

logs offline, effectively resolving the
SYSLOG management deficient saving space problem.
Provides basic TCP/IP attack prevention

TCP/IP protocol stack capability, such as attacks from incorrect IP
attack prevention packets, ICMP ping/jolt, and DoS.
Provides ACL based on IP addresses and

Access control list (ACL) port numbers.
Supports SSL3.0/TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2
SSL/TLS encryption and provides secure encrypted tunnels
communication based on security certifications.
Supports SSHv2 clients and servers to

provide Secure File Transfer Protocol
SSH security (SFTP) client services and STelnet
communication services.
Provides OSPFv2, capable of standard

OSPF route protocol MD5 authentication.
Provides NTPv3, capable of MD5

NTP protocol authentication and authorization control.
Provides SNMPv3, capable of security

SNMP management authentication and data encryption
protocol functions.
Data plane Flow control Monitors port traffic. Suppresses multicast

packets, discards unknown unicast/
multicast packets, and uses QoS to control
service traffic.
Discarding of error packets Discards invalid error packets. For

example, a packet whose size is smaller
than 46 bytes.

Plane Function Description
Loop avoidance Detects loopback at services ports, blocks

loopback, and supports service loopback
detection of Ethernet ports.
Layer 2 service access Provides the access control capabilities:

control filtering of static MAC addresses, blacklist,
learning and forbidding of MAC addresses,
and filtering based on complex traffic
classification.
Service isolation Provides three isolation methods: Layer 2

logical isolation, horizontal isolation, and
physical isolation.
Strict isolation of user Strictly isolates MPLS services within the

services carrier networks and from client-side
services.
For details about security, see Security White Paper and Security Configuration, Maintenance
and Hardening Manual.

Product Description 12 Energy Saving and Environment Protection
12 Energy Saving and Environment

Protection
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with RoHS directive (2002/95/EC), WEEE directive
(2002/96/EC) and REACH (REGULATION (EC) No 1907/2006).
12.1 Energy Saving

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy saving.
12.2 Environment Protection
The OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the requirements of sustainable
development. All components and packages of the equipment are identified in compliance
with the associated standards for recycling.

12.1 Energy Saving

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy saving.
Static Energy Saving

Regarding static energy saving, the OptiX OSN equipment takes the following measures:
l Uses an easy scheme for board design.
l Replaces the ordinary chips with ASIC chips that require a low power consumption.
l Uses components with low power consumption, if possible.
l Uses the power module with high efficiency.
l Uses power modules of which the output power is close to the power consumption of
boards, if possible.
l Replaces the linear power supplies with switching power supplies.
l Uses the standard digital voltage.
l Provides a power switch for each subrack. Thus, the power supply for the subrack can be
shut down the manually.
Dynamic Energy Saving

Energy saving (power down) design for boards:
l Power down design: Idle buses are powered down. That is, the buses that are not
configured with services and the buses of the idle slots are in power down state.
l Some boards support the standby state design, based on which a board, its modules, and
its ports that are not used enter the standby state, reducing power consumption.
Heat dissipation design: The OptiX OSN equipment provides auto speed mode of fan speed
adjustment. In auto speed mode, the speeds of the fans in different partitions are adjusted
separately and steplessly according to the board temperatures of the partitions. The speed of
the fans in the low-temperature partition is automatically adjusted to a low level for energy
saving. For details about the fan speed adjustment scheme, see the Hardware Description.
Control and Monitoring of Energy Saving

You can control and monitor the energy saving through the NMS.
You can query the power consumption of a board on a real-time basis.
12.2 Environment Protection

The OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the requirements of sustainable
development. All components and packages of the equipment are identified in compliance
with the associated standards for recycling.
l The OptiX OSN equipment not only provides necessary packing materials, but also
guarantees that the size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at
most three times the size of the net equipment.

l The product is also designed for easy unpacking. For details about how to unpack the
equipment, see the associated manual. In addition, all hazardous substances contained in
packaging decompose easily.
l Every plastic component that weighs over 25g is labeled according to the standards of
ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the
equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling.
l Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by
using simple tools.
l All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain identification
information, such as silkscreens, is printed on the front panel or subrack.

Product Description 13 Technical Specifications
13 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
The technical specifications provide the specifications of the optical interfaces, electrical
interfaces and environment.
13.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment

The overall specifications of the equipment include the packet switching capability, TDM
cross-connect capability, specifications of the cabinet, specifications of the subrack, power
supply parameters, laser safety class, electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and
environmental specifications.
13.2 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series
equipment.
13.3 Safety Certification
The OptiX OSN 3500 has received several safety certifications.
13.4 Environmental Conditions
The OptiX OSN equipment requires a different environment during storage, transportation,
and operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions.

13.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment

The overall specifications of the equipment include the packet switching capability, TDM
cross-connect capability, specifications of the cabinet, specifications of the subrack, power
supply parameters, laser safety class, electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and
environmental specifications.
13.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, number of
permitted subracks, and PDU.
Table 13-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 13-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of Permitted

Subracks
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (T63) 58 1
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (N63E) 41 1
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) (N66T) 71 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) (T66) 80 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (T63) 63 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (N63E) 45 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) (N66T) 76 4
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) (T66) 85 4
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) (T63) 73 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) (T66) 101 4

NOTE
The 600 mm ETSI cabinet can house:
l Non-high power subracks that reside in back-to-back mode.
l Enhanced subracks (1100 W) that reside in back-to-back mode.
NOTE
Both the N63E cabinet and N66T cabinet are available in two heights, namely, 2000 mm and 2200 mm.
If the cabinet that is 2600 mm high is required, add an enclosure frame that is 400 mm high on a cabinet
that is 2200 mm high.
The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top of a cabinet and is used to provide
power to the equipment. Table 13-2 lists the technical specifications of the PDU.

Table 13-2 Technical specifications of the PDU

Board Dimensions Single-Cabinet Single-Cabinet Output
(mm) Input Voltage Output Voltage Current (A)
(V) (V)
DPD100-2 442 (W) x 79.6 -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 l 4x32 A

-8 PDU (D) x 110 (H) l 4x20 A
-60 (DC) -48 to -72
N1PDU 530 (W) x 97 (D) -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 l 4x32 A

x 133 (H) l 4x20 A
-60 (DC) -48 to -72
DPD63-8- 442 (W) x 79.6 -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 l 4x63 A

8 PDU (D) x 110 (H) l 4x32 A
-60 (DC) -48 to -72
TN51PDU 535 (W) x 147 -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 l 4x63 A

(D) x 133 (H) l 4x32 A
-60 (DC) -48 to -72
NOTE
l Two power inputs that back up each other need to be provided, and they work in load-sharing mode.
l In the telecommunications room, it is required that the PDU needs to provide power supply for an
entire subrack. In this case, normal power supply can be guaranteed when either of the power inputs
fails.
NOTE
The number of subracks that a cabinet can house is determined by the subrack power consumption and
the number of PDU inputs/outputs.
l If there are two 32 A power supplies available in the telecommunications room, a cabinet houses a
maximum of one type-III subrack.
l If there are four 32 A or two 63 A power supplies available in the telecommunications room, a
cabinet houses a maximum of two type-III subracks, with each subrack consuming less than 1100
W power.
13.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack

The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum
power consumption.
Table 13-3 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Table 13-3 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) 23 (net weight of the subrack that is not
installed with boards or fans)
Table 13-4 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Table 13-4 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Subrack Maximum Fuse Typical Configuration
Type Power Capaci
Consumpt ty Typical Power Typical Configuration
Consumption
iona
General 720 W 20 A 480 W l Two N1SLD64 (S-64.2b, LC)

OptiX boards
OSN l Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC)
3500 boards
subrack
l Two N1SLQ16 (L-16.2, LC)
boards
l Two N1SLH1 (S-1.1, LC)
boards
l Four N1OU08 boards
l Two N2EGT2 boards
l Two N1PSXCS boards
l One N4GSCC board
l One N1AUX board
l Two N1PIU boards
Enhanced 1100 W 32 A 535 W l Two N1SL64 (S-64.2b, LC)

OptiX boards
OSN l Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC)
3500 boards
subrack
l One N1SLT1 (S-1.1, LC)
board
l Two N1PEG8 boards
l Two N1PEX2 boards
l Two N1PETF8 boards
l Two N2PSXCSA boards
l One N1AUX board
l Two N6GSCC boards
l Two N1PIUA boards
OptiX 2300 W 63 A 709 W l Five N1PEG8 boards

OSN l Two N1PEX2 boards
3500
type-III l Two N2PEX1 boards
subrack l Three N1PETF8 boards
l Two N2PSXCSA boards
l One N1AUX board
l Two N1PIUB boards
l Two N6GSCC boards
l Three N1FAN boards

Subrack Maximum Fuse Typical Configuration

Type Power Capaci
Consumpt ty Typical Power Typical Configuration
Consumption
iona
a: The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption

configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of
the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
of the subrack in typical configuration.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat
consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each
other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
Table 13-5 lists the predicted reliability specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 13-5 Equipment predicted reliability

System Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) Mean Time Between Failures
Availability (MTBF)
0.999996370 1 hour 31.45 years
13.1.3 Power Supply Parameters

This section describes the parameters for the equipment.
Table 13-6 lists the power supply parameters.
Table 13-6 Power supply parameters

Item Specification
Power supply mode DC power supply
Nominal voltage -48 V or -60 V
Voltage range -38.4 V to -57.6 V or -48 V to -72 V
Maximum current 20 Aa/32 Ab/63 Ac
a: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the common subrack
(720 W) is used.
b: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the enhanced subrack
(1100 W) is used.
c: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the type-III subrack is
used.

13.1.4 Packet System Performance

Different packet performance parameters are available for different packet performance items
of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 13-7 lists the system packet performance parameters specified for the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Table 13-7 System packet performance specifications

Item Specifications
Protection MPLS tunnel Maximum number

NOTE APS l N4GSCC: 1K
l For
l N6GSCC: 4K
distribute
d MPLS
MPLS PW APS Maximum number l N4GSCC: 1K
APS,
MPLS l N6GSCC: 4K
tunnel
APS and Maximum number 512
MPLS of bound members
PW APS
share MPLS-TP Maximum number
resources. tunnel APS l N4GSCC: 1K
l For
centralize l N6GSCC: 1K
d MPLS
APS, MPLS-TP PW Maximum number l N4GSCC: 1K
MPLS APS l N6GSCC: 1K
tunnel
APS,
Maximum number 512
MPLS
PW APS, of bound members
MPLS-TP
tunnel
MRPS Maximum number l N4GSCC: 16
APS, of ring networks l N6GSCC: 32
MPLS-TP supported by a
PW APS, device
and
MPLS-TP Maximum number 64
ring of nodes
protection supported by a
switching
(MRPS)
ring network
share
resources
(one
MRPS
ring uses
two APS
resources)
.

Item Specifications
Maximum number 32
of virtual nodes NOTE
supported by a MRPS can protect services on
ring network intersecting rings. If two rings
intersect, two intersecting nodes that
are farthest apart are configured as
intersecting nodes. If one of the
intersecting nodes fails, services are
transmitted from one intersecting
ring to the other one through the
other intersecting node. The
intersecting nodes are logical nodes.
When a ring intersects with multiple
rings, intersecting nodes need to be
configured between the ring and all
the other rings.
Maximum number l Maximum number of

of multicast multicast services supported
services per NE: 32
l Maximum number of
multicast services supported
per ring: 8
LPT Maximum number: 96
LAG Maximum number 64

of LAGs
Maximum number 16
of members in
each LAG
MC-LAG Maximum number: 64
MSTP Maximum number 16

of instances per
port
Maximum number 12
of port groups
Maximum number 100

of MSTP-enabled
ports supported by
a device
Maintenance MPLS tunnel Maximum number

OAM l N4GSCC: 2K
l N6GSCC: 8K
MPLS PW Maximum number

OAM l N4GSCC: 2K
l N6GSCC: 8K

Item Specifications
NOTE MPLS-TP Maximum number
l For tunnel OAM l N4GSCC: 2K
distribute
d MPLS l N6GSCC: 2K
OAM,
MPLS MPLS-TP PW Maximum number
tunnel
OAM,
OAM l N4GSCC: 2K
MPLS
l N6GSCC: 2K
PW
OAM,
ETH OAM MD Maximum number: 64
and ETH
OAM MA Maximum number: 1K
share
resources. MEP Maximum number: 2K
l For
centralize MRPS OAM l N4GSCC: 32
d MPLS
OAM, l N6GSCC: 64
MPLS NOTE
tunnel An MRPS ring occupies two OAM resources. MRPS OAM is
OAM, automatically configured when an MRPS ring is created.
MPLS
PW ATM OAM Maximum number: 8K
OAM, (VP/VC level)
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAM,
MPLS-TP
PW
OAM,
ETH
OAM,
and
MRPS
OAM
share
resources.
Service Maximum l N4GSCC: 4K

number of E- l N6GSCC: 8K
Line services
Maximum 1020
number of E-
LAN services
Maximum 4
number of E-
Aggr services
Maximum 4032
number of CES
services

Item Specifications
Maximum Local services 1K

number of ATM
services Remote services 2K
IGMP Maximum 1K
snooping number of
multicast
groups
Maximum 6K
number of
members in
each multicast
group
HQoS Maximum 127

number of
service WRED
policies
Maximum 8
number of port
WRED policies
Maximum 256
number of
WFQ templates
Maximum 256
number of V-
UNI ingress
policies
Maximum 256
number of V-
UNI egress
policies
Maximum 100
number of port
policies
Maximum 256
number of PW
policies
Maximum 256
number of
QinQ policies
Maximum 8
number of
DiffServ
domains

Item Specifications
Maximum 1600
number of port
flows
Maximum 4K
number of V-
UNI ingress
flows
Maximum 20
number of
traffic
classification
rules
Maximum 4K
number of
ACLs
Others MPLS tunnel Size of the global 32768

ingress label space NOTE
0 to 15 are special labels and cannot
be used for LSP services.
Maximum number l Unidirectional:

– N4GSCC: 4K
– N6GSCC: 16K
l Bidirectional:
– N4GSCC: 2K
– N6GSCC: 8K
NOTE
l Bidirectional tunnels and
unidirectional tunnels share
tunnel resources. A bidirectional
tunnel is counted as two
unidirectional tunnels.
l An MRPS ring occupies 4 x N
tunnels (N is the number of
nodes on the ring). Tunnel
resources are automatically
allocated to an MRPS ring when
the MRPS ring is configured.
Maximum Bidirectional 16K

number of static
PWs
Maximum 8192
number of MS-
PWs

Item Specifications
Maximum 1
number of split
horizon groups
supported by
each E-LAN
Maximum 1K
number of
QinQ links
Maximum l N4GSCC: 8K
number of ETH l N6GSCC: 16K
V-UNIs
Maximum Maximum number of ETH V-NNIs = Maximum

number of ETH number of PWs + Maximum number of QinQ links +
V-NNIs Maximum number of physical ports
Maximum 1K
number of ETH
V-UNI groups
Maximum 2000
number of
members in
each ETH V-
UNI group
Maximum 256
number of
virtual ports
(including V-
UNIs and V-
NNIs)
supported by E-
LAN
Maximum 8K
number of
virtual ports
(including V-
UNIs and V-
NNIs)
supported by a
device
MAC address Maximum number 2K

of static MAC
addresses
supported by E-
LAN

Item Specifications
Maximum number 65534

of dynamic MAC
addresses
supported by E-
LAN
Maximum number 256K

of dynamic MAC
addresses
supported by a
device
Maximum 2K
number of
members in a
blacklist
13.1.5 Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock scheme provided by the equipment meets the bearer network standard. It is also
applicable to synchronization of the synchronous Ethernet clock, and 1588v2 time. In
addition, it can be used for high precision synchronization of wireless transmission networks.
Table 13-8 lists the timing and synchronization performance of a bearer network.
Table 13-8 Timing and synchronization performance

Performance Description
Output Jitter ITU-T G.813 compliant
Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
Table 13-9 lists the 1588v2 timing and clock synchronization performance.
Table 13-9 Specifications associated with IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization

Item Specifications
Support capability Number of ports: 16
Precision in the case of single hop ±30 ns
Precision in the case of 30 stations ±1 us
Clock model l OC
l BC

Item Specifications
Selection method for time sources l BMC algorithm

l Static selection for time sources
Packet encapsulation format l EthernetII IEEE802.3

l OTN Overheads
End-to-end delay measurement (E2E Supported

mode)
Peer-to-peer delay measurement (P2P Supported

mode)
Delay compensation type l Automatic ring network compensation

l Automatic single-fiber two-way dispersion
compensation
Devices supporting IEEE 1588v2 OptiX OSN 550/Huawei routers/Huawei base

interconnection stations/BITSs
Devices not supporting IEEE 1588v2 PTN/RTN/WDM

interconnection
Table 13-10 lists the synchronous Ethernet clock performance.
Table 13-10 Specifications associated with synchronous Ethernet clocks
Item Specifications
Support capability Number of ports: 64
Clock frequency accuracy (24 hours) ±1 ppm
Synchronization precision Complies with ITU-T G.

8262.
13.1.6 TDM Transmission Performance

The TDM transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 13-11 lists the TDM transmission performance.
Table 13-11 TDM transmission performance
Jitter at STM-N Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825
Jitter at PDH Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783

Bit Error Compliant with ITU-T G.826
13.1.7 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
Table 13-12 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards.
Table 13-12 Laser safety class

Laser Requirement for Board
Safety Optical Power
Class
Class 1 The maximum output l Packet processing boards

optical power of an l Packet interface boards
optical interface is
lower than 10 dBm l EoD boards
(10 mW). l SDH boards
l E1 optical interface boards
l EoS boards
l ATM boards
l RPR boards
l SAN/Video boards
l WDM boards: N1MR2A, N1MR2C, N1FIB,
N1LWX
l Dispersion compensation boards: DCU
Class 4 The maximum output Optical amplifier boards: N1RPC01, N1RPC02

optical power of an
optical interface is
higher than 27 dBm
(500 mW).
Class The maximum output l WDM boards: TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4,

1M optical power of an TN11MR2, TN11MR4, N1CMD2
optical interface is l Optical power amplifier boards: N2BPA,
between 10 dBm (10 TN11OBU1, N1BPA, N1BA2, 61COA, N1COA,
mW) and 22.15 dBm 62COA
(164 mW).
13.1.8 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127
standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) related tests.

Table 13-13 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.
Table 13-13 EMC test results
Item Standard
Radiated emission CISPR22 Class

AEN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for DC ports CISPR22 Class A

EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A

EN55022 Class A
Immunity to radiated ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz-2700 MHz: 10 V/m)
Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: ±8 kV; contact
discharge: ±6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

bursts for DC ports IEC 61000-4-4 (±1 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2

bursts for signal ports IEC 61000-4-4 (±1 kV)
Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: ±1 kV, line to ground:
±2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-5 (±1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

interference for DC ports IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous conducted ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

interference for signal ports IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous voltage dips ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

and short interruption and voltage IEC 61000-4-29
variation for DC power port
13.1.9 Environmental Specification

The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table
13-14.

Table 13-14 Environment specifications for long-term operation

Specifications Description
Altitude ≤ 4850 m
Air pressure 55 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0 °C to 45 °C
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismic Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD

performance
13.2 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight

of Each Board
This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series
equipment.
Table 13-15 lists the power consumption and weight of each board.
Table 13-15 Power consumption and weight of each board

Board Power Weigh Applica Board Power Wei Applic
Consum t (kg) ble Consumpti ght able
ption Equipm on (W) (kg) Equip
(W) ent ment
SDH boards
N1SL4 17 0.6 OSN N1SLD4 17 0.6 OSN

A 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N1SF64 33(the 1.1 OSN N2SLD4 15 1.0 OSN

A OptiX 3500/75 1500/35
OSN 3500 00 00/7500
supports)
26(the
OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)


(W) ent ment
N1SF64 33(the 1.1 OSN R1SLD4 11 0.5 OSN

OptiX 3500/75 1500
OSN 3500 00
supports)
26(the
OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
N1SL64 30(the 1.1 OSN N1SL4 17 0.6 OSN

OptiX 3500/75 1500/35
OSN 3500 00 00/7500
supports)
22(the
OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
N2SL64 32 1.1 OSN N2SL4 15 1.0 OSN

3500 1500/35
00/7500
T2SL64 40 1.1 OSN R1SL4 10 0.5 OSN

7500 1500
N1SLO 38 1.0 OSN N1SEP1 16 1.0 OSN

16 3500/75 1500/35
00 00/7500
N1SLQ 20 0.9 OSN N1SLH1 27 1.0 OSN

16 3500/75 3500/75
00 00/7500
II
N2SLQ 35 1.3 OSN N1SLT1 22 1.3 OSN

16 3500/75 1500/35
00 00/7500
N1SLD 23 0.9 OSN N2SLO1 26 1.1 OSN

16 3500 1500/35
00/7500
N1SL16 20 0.6 OSN N3SLO1 20 1.2 OSN

A 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N2SL16 20 1.1 OSN N1SLQ1 15 1.0 OSN

A 1500/35 A 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
/7500 II


(W) ent ment
N3SL16 22 0.9 OSN N1SLQ1 15 1.0 OSN

A 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II
N1SL16 20 1.1 OSN N2SLQ1 15 1.0 OSN

1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N2SL16 20 1.1 OSN R1SLQ1 12 0.4 OSN

1500/35 1500
00/7500
N3SL16 22 1.1 OSN N1SL1A 17 0.6 OSN

1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II
N1SLQ 17 1.0 OSN N1SL1 17 0.6 OSN

4A 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II
N1SLQ 17 1.0 OSN N2SL1 14 1.0 OSN

4 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N2SLQ 16 1.0 OSN R1SL1 10 0.3 OSN

4 1500/35 1500
00/7500
N1SLD 17 0.6 OSN N1SF16 26 1.1 OSN

4A 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
T2SL64 40 1.1 OSN N3SLQ4 12 0.7 OSN

A 7500 1 1500/35
00/7500
/7500 II
N1EU0 11 0.4 OSN N1EU04 6 0.4 OSN

8 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00
7500 II
N1OU0 6 0.4 OSN N2OU08 6 0.4 OSN

8 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II


(W) ent ment
N3SLH 49 1.5 OSN N1SLD6 41 1.2 OSN

41 3500/75 4 3500/75
00/7500 00
II
N4SL64 15 1.1 OSN N1SF16 26 0.6 OSN

3500/75 E 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
II
N4SLQ 12 0.7 OSN N4SLO1 21 1.0 OSN

16 3500/75 6 3500/75
00/7500 00/7500
II II
N4SLD 20 1.2 OSN N4SF64 26 1.2 OSN

64 3500/75 3500/75
00/7500 00
II
N4SFD 37 1.1 OSN - - - -

64 3500/75
00
PDH boards
N1SPQ 24 0.9 OSN N2PL3 12 0.9 OSN

4 1500/35 1500/35
00 00/7500
N2SPQ 24 0.9 OSN N1PQM 22 1.0 OSN

4 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II /7500 II
N1DXA 10 0.8 OSN N1PQ1 19 1.0 OSN

1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N1DX1 15 1.0 OSN N2PQ1 13 1.0 OSN

1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
/7500 II
N1PD3 19 1.1 OSN R2PD1 15 0.6 OSN

1500/35 1500
00/7500
N2PD3 12 1.1 OSN R1PD1 15 0.6 OSN

1500/35 1500
00/7500


(W) ent ment
N2PL3 12 0.9 OSN R1PL1 7 0.5 OSN

A 1500/35 1500
00/7500
N1PL3 15 1.0 OSN N2PQ3 13 0.9 OSN

1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
/7500 II
N1DM1 0 0.4 OSN N1TSB8 0 0.3 OSN

2 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II /7500 II
N1TSB 3 0.3 OSN N1MU0 2 0.4 OSN

4 1500/35 4 1500/35
00 00/7500
/7500 II
N1C34S 0 0.3 OSN R1L12S 0 0.3 OSN

1500/35 1500
00/7500
N1D34 0 0.4 OSN N1D12B 0 0.3 OSN

S 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II /7500 II
N1D75 0 0.4 OSN R1L75S 0 0.3 OSN

S 1500/35 1500
00/7500/
7500 II
N1D12 0 0.4 OSN N1PFL1 19 1.0 OSN

S 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II
N3DX1 15 1.0 OSN - - - -

1500/35
00/7500/
7500 II
Data boards (TDM mode)
N1MST 26 0.9 OSN N2EFS4 30 1.0 OSN

4 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500


(W) ent ment
N1IDQ 41 1.0 OSN N3EFS4 18 0.6 OSN

1 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N1IDL4 41 1.0 OSN N1EFS0 32 0.7 OSN

1500/35 A 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
/7500 II
N1ADQ 41 1.0 OSN N1EFS0 35 1.0 OSN

1 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00
N1ADL 41 0.9 OSN N2EFS0 35 1.0 OSN

4 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N1EAS 70 1.2 OSN N4EFS0 35 1.0 OSN

2 3500/75 1500/35
00 00/7500
N2EGR 40 1.1 OSN N1EGT2 29 0.9 OSN

2 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N1EGS 70 1.1 OSN N1EFT8 26 1.0 OSN

4 1500/35 A 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N3EGS 70 1.1 OSN N1EFT8 26 1.0 OSN

4 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N4EGS 34 0.7 OSN N1EMS 65 1.1 OSN

4 1500/35 4 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II
N1EMS 40 0.8 OSN N1VST4 37 0.8 OSN

2 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
/7500 II
N2EGS 43 1.0 OSN R1EFT4 14 0.5 OSN

2 1500/35 1500
00/7500
N3EGS 25 0.6 OSN N2EMR 50 1.2 OSN

2 1500/35 0 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500


(W) ent ment
N1EFS4 30 1.0 OSN N1ETF8 11 0.4 OSN

1500/35 A 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N1ETS 0 0.4 OSN N1EFF8 15 0.4 OSN

8 1500/35 A 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II
N1EFF8 6 0.4 OSN N1ETF8 2 0.4 OSN

1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II /7500 II
N3EAS Room 1.1 OSN N2EFT8 26 1.0 OSN

2 temperatu 3500/75 A 1500/35
re (25°C): 00/7500 00/7500
83 II
High
temperatu
re (55°C):
93
N2EGT 15 0.9 OSN N5EFS0 22 0.6 OSN

2 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
N2EFT 26 1.0 OSN N1EGS 85 1.2 OSN

8 1500/35 H 7500/75
00/7500 00 II
R2EFT4 14 0.5 OSN - - - -

1500
Packet boards
R1PEFS 13 0.3 OSN N1PETF 6 0.4 OSN

8 1500 8 3500/75
00
Q1PEG 9 0.6 OSN N1PEG1 137 2.3 OSN

S2 1500 6 3500
R1PEG 8 0.4 OSN N1PEX1 107 2.4 OSN

S1 1500 3500
N1PEG 47 1.2 OSN N1PEX2 49 1.4 OSN

8 3500/75 3500/75
00 00


(W) ent ment
N2PEX 48 1.4 OSN N1PEFF 12 0.5 OSN

1 3500/75 8 3500/75
00 00
TNN1E 60 1.3 OSN TNN1E 58 1.3 OSN

X2 7500 II G8 7500 II
TNN1C 17 0.6 OSN TNN1E 11 0.5 OSN

O1 7500 II TMC 7500 II
TNN1D 15 0.4 OSN TNN1A 26 0.8 OSN

75E 7500 II FO1 7500 II
TNN1D 15 0.4 OSN TNN1EF 16 0.6 OSN

12E 7500 II F8 7500 II
R1PEF4 13 0.4 OSN TNN1E 58 1.05 OSN

F 1500 G16 7500 II
EoD Boards
N1EDQ 70 1.0 OSN - - - -

41 3500/75
00/7500
II
Service-Hybrid Line Boards
TNN1H 142 2.3 OSN TNN1H 142 2.5 OSN

UNS3 7500 II UNQ2 7500 II
TNN1H 142 2.5 OSN N1HSN 55 2.3 OSN

SNQ2 7500 II S3 3500/75
00
OTN Tributary Boards
TNN1T 25 0.7 OSN TNN1T 50 1.6 OSN

OA 7500 II QX 7500 II
CES boards
N1MD7 12 0.5 OSN N1MD1 12 0.5 OSN

5 3500/75 2 3500/75
00 00
N1CQ1 10 0.5 OSN R1ML1 16 0.4 OSN

3500/75 A/B 1500
00
PCM boards


(W) ent ment
N1FXS 24 0.65 OSN N1FXO1 24 0.65 OSN

O12 1500/35 2 1500/35
00 00
N1AT6 15 0.75 OSN N1FXS1 24 0.65 OSN

1500/35 2 1500/35
00 00
N2AT6 15 0.75 OSN - - - -

1500/35
00
WDM boards
N1FIB 0 0.4 OSN N1MR2 0 1.0 OSN

1500/35 B 1500
00/7500
N1MR2 0 1.0 OSN TN11M 0 0.9 OSN

A 1500/35 R2 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
/7500 II
N1LWX 30 1.1 OSN TN11C 0 0.9 OSN

1500/35 MR4 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
TN11M 0 0.9 OSN TN11C 0 0.8 OSN

R4 1500/35 MR2 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II
N1MR2 0 1.0 OSN N1CMD 0 0.6 OSN

C 1500/35 2 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
/7500 II
TNN1X 0 0.6 OSN - - - -

MD2 7500 II
Cross-Connect and system control boards
N1PSX 90 2.1 OSN R1PCXL 60 1.0 OSN

CS 3500 N 1500
T1PSX 87 1.4 OSN N4GSC 19 1.0 OSN

CSA 7500 C 3500/75
00
N2PSX 80 1.2 OSN N3PSXC 80 1.5 OSN

CSA 3500 SA 3500


(W) ent ment
TNN1S 27 1.0 OSN TNN1PS 150 2.4 OSN

CA 7500 II XCS 7500 II
N6GSC 19 0.9 OSN T2PSXC 87 1.8 OSN

C 3500/75 SA 7500
00
N1SXC 63 2.0 OSN TNN1IX 78 2.4 OSN

SA 3500 CS 7500 II
N1IXC 94 2.1 OSN T1SXCS 96 2.2 OSN

SA 3500 A 7500
T1IXCS 140 2.4 OSN - - - -

A 7500
Auxiliary boards
N1FAN 19 1.2 OSN R1AMU 8 0.5 OSN

A 7500 1500
XE1FA 15 1.5 OSN R1AUX 19 1.0 OSN

N 3500 1500
R1FAN 20 0.8 OSN R2AUX 19 1.0 OSN

1500 1500
TN81F 21 4.5 OSN N1AUX 19 1.0 OSN

AN 7500 II 3500
T1EOW 13 0.5 OSN T1AUX 3 0.4 OSN

7500 7500
R1EOW 10 0.4 OSN - - - -

1500
Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards
N1DCU 0 0.4 OSN 62COA 75 8.0 OSN

3500/75 1500/35
00 00/7500
/7500 II
N2DCU 0 0.4 OSN N1COA 10 3.5 OSN

3500/75 1500/35
00/7500 00/7500
II /7500 II
N1RPC 110 4.2 OSN N1BPA 20 1.0 OSN

02 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II


(W) ent ment
N1RPC 70 4.0 OSN N2BPA 19 1.2 OSN

01 1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/7500
7500 II /7500 II
61COA 10 3.5 OSN N1BA2 19 1.0 OSN

1500/35 1500/35
00/7500/ 00/750
7500 II
TN11O 16 1.3 OSN TN11OB 16 1.3 OSN

BU101 3500/75 U103 3500/75
00 00
TN12O 16 1.1 OSN TN12OB 16 1.1 OSN

BU101 7500 II U103 7500 II
TN12O 14 1.6 OSN - - - -

BU2 3500/75
00
Power interface boards
R1PIU 0 0.5 OSN N1PIU 0 1.2 OSN

A 1500 3500
R1PIUB 0 0.4 OSN R1PIUC 0 0.5 OSN

1500 1500
N1PIU 0 0.5 OSN R1PIU 0 0.4 OSN

A 3500 1500
T1PIU 8 1.3 OSN UPM - 15 OSN

7500 (EPS75- 1500/35
4815AF) 00/7500
UPM - 10 OSN UPM - 10 OSN

(GIE48 1500 (ETP483 1500
05S) 0)
UPM - 10 OSN TN81PI 7 1.6 OSN

(ETP48 3500/75 U 7500 II
90) 00
N1PIU 0 0.6 OSN T1PIUB 8 0.5 OSN

B 3500 7500

13.3 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 3500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 13-16 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received.
Table 13-16 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received
Item Standard
EMC CISPR22 Class A

CISPR24
EN55022 Class A
EN50024
ETSI EN 300 386 Class A
ETSI ES 201 468
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A
ICES 003 Class A
AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
GB9254 Class A
VCCI Class A
Safety IEC 60950-1

IEC/EN41003
EN 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 No 60950-1
AS/NZS 60950-1
BS EN 60950-1
IS 13252
GB4943
Laser safety FDA rules

21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
IEC60825-1
IEC60825-2
EN60825-1
EN60825-2
GB7247

Item Standard
Health ICNIRP Guideline

1999-519-EC
EN 50385
OET Bulletin 65
IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection 2002/95/EC (RoHS)

2002/96/EC (WEEE)
REGULATION (EC) No 1907/2006 (REACH)
13.4 Environmental Conditions

The OptiX OSN equipment requires a different environment during storage, transportation,
and operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions.
The following international standards are used as the reference for specifying the
environmental conditions:
l ETSI (European Telecommunication Standards Institute) EN 300 019

l IEC 60068-2-x
l ETSI EN 300 753
l GR-63-CORE
NOTE
For details about the environment requirements, see Operating Environment and O&M Guide to
Huawei Frame-shaped Transport Equipment.
13.4.1 Environment for Storage

The storage environment for the OptiX OSN equipment complies with the ETSI EN 300
019-1-1 and NEBS GR-63-CORE standards.
Climatic Conditions
Table 13-17 lists the climatic conditions for storage.
Table 13-17 Climatic conditions for storage
Item Range
Air temperature -40°C to +70°C
Rate of change of temperature ≤ 1°C/min

Item Range
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
Waterproof Requirements
Generally, the equipment on the customer site must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment cartons. The equipment
should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage such as near
the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l The cartons must be intact.

l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.
l There should be no water on the ground where the cartons are placed.
l The cartons must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Conditions
l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.
l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified
in Table 13-18.
Table 13-18 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during
storage
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Dust (suspension) ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Dust (sedimentation) ≤ 20.0 mg/(m2h)
Sand ≤ 300 mg/m3
l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in
Table 13-19.

Table 13-19 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during storage
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 13-20 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 13-20 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage
Item Sub-Item Range
Random vibration Acceleration spectral - 0.02 m2/s3 -

density
Frequency 5 Hz to 10 10 Hz to 50 50 Hz to 100
Hz Hz Hz
dB/oct +12 - -12
13.4.2 Environment for Transportation

The transportation environment for the OptiX OSN equipment complies with the ETSI EN
300 019-1-2 standard.
Climatic Conditions
Table 13-21 lists the climatic conditions for transportation.
Table 13-21 Climatic conditions for transportation
Item Range

Item Range
Air temperature -40°C to +70°C
Rate of change of temperature ≤ 1°C/min
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
Waterproof Requirements
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l The cartons must be intact.
l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.
l There should be no water in the transportation tool.
Air Cleanness
corrosive dust.
in Table 13-22.
transportation
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Dust (suspension) No requirement
Dust (sedimentation) ≤ 3.0 mg/(m2h)
Sand ≤ 100 mg/m3
Table 13-23.

Table 13-23 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during
transportation
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3
Cl2 -
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 13-24 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during transportation.
Table 13-24 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation

Item Sub-Item Range
Random vibration Acceleration spectral 1 m2/s3 -3 dB/oct

density
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock Response spectrum I 100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each

(sample weight > 50 kg) surface
Response spectrum II 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on each

(sample weight ≤ 50 kg) surface
NOTE
The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment
that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with
the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
13.4.3 Environment for Operation

The operation environment for the OptiX OSN equipment complies with the ETSI EN 300
019-1-3 class3.2 standard.
Climatic Conditions
Table 13-25 list the climatic conditions when the OptiX OSN equipment operates.

Table 13-25 Requirements on temperature and humidity during operation
Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term Short-term working Long-term working Short-term working

working conditions conditions conditions
conditions
0°C to 45°C -5°C to +55°C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in
front of the equipment. Short-term working conditions mean that the continuous working time of the
equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and that the accumulated working time every year does not exceed
15 days.
To improve equipment reliability, ensure that the equipment room is equipped with a precise
air conditioner, which controls temperature and humidity within the following ranges:
l Temperature range: 15°C to 30°C

l Humidity range: 40% to 75%
NOTE
Do not install an air conditioner right above equipment, to prevent air blowing directly from the air
conditioner vent into the equipment. Install an air conditioner as far away from a window as possible, to
prevent humid air blowing from the window to the equipment.
Table 13-26 Other climate requirements during operation
Item Specification
Altitude -60 m to 4000 m
Temperature change rate 0.5°C/min
Wind speed ≤ 5 m/s
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/m²
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m²
NOTE
Between 1800 m and 4000 m of altitude, the equipment operating temperature decreases by 1°C for
every increase of 220 m in altitude.

Air Cleanness
corrosive dust.
in Table 13-27.
operation
Mechanically Active Content
Substance
Dust (suspension) ≤ 0.4 mg/m3
Dust (sedimentation) ≤ 15 mg/(m2h)
Sand ≤ 300 mg/m3
Table 13-28.
Table 13-28 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during
operation
Chemically Active Content
Substance
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 13-29 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during operation.

Table 13-29 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation

Item Sub-Item Range
Sinusoidal Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -

vibration
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock Shock response Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on

spectrum II each surface
Static load 0 kPa

NOTE
The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment
that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with
the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

Product Description 14 Complied Standards
14 Complied Standards
About This Chapter
This topic lists the standards that OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
14.1 ITU-T Recommendations

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
14.2 IEEE Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the IEEE standards.
14.3 IETF Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the IETF standards.
14.4 ANSI Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the ANSI related standards.
14.5 Environment Related Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the environment related standards.
14.6 EMC Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the EMC related standards.
14.7 Safety Compliance Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the safety compliance related standards.
14.8 Protection Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the protection related standards.
14.9 Packet Standards
The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the packet related standards.

14.1 ITU-T Recommendations

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
Table 14-1 ITU-T recommendations

Recommendation Description
G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport

systems
G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical

fiber and cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of
optical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-

systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and

sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH
systems with optical amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and
44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check(CRC) procedures

relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.
704
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy

(SDH)
G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.711 Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies.

G.712 Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation

channels.
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission

systems
G.774 1 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information

G.774 2 model for the network element view
G.774 3
G.774 4
G.774 5
G.774.6 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) unidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view
G.774.7 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of lower order

path trace and interface labeling for the network element view
G.774.9 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view
G.774.10 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect
detection and clearance criteria
G.7710 Common equipment management function requirements
G.780 Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)

networks and equipment
G.781 Synchronization layer functions
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment

functional blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.801 Digital transmission models
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.805 Generic functional architecture of transport networks
G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment – Description methodology

and generic functionality
G.808.1 Generic protection switching – Linear trail and subnetwork

protection
G.810 Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks

G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks
in synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating

at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an
integrated services digital network
G.822 Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy
based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy
based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator

sections
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for
use on optical fiber cables
G.7043 Virtual concatenation of plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

signals
G.8010 Architecture of Ethernet layer network
G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
G.8011.1 Ethernet private line service
G.8011.2 Ethernet virtual private line service
G.8011.3 Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Service
G.8011.4 Ethernet virtual private rooted multipoint service

G.8011.5 Ethernet private LAN service
G.8012 Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI
G.8012.1 Interfaces for the Ethernet Transport Network
G.8013/Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
G.8040 GFP frame mapping into Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH)
G.8101 Terms and definitions for MPLS transport profile
G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
G.8110.1 Architecture of MPLS-TP Layer Network
G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
G.8113.1 Operations, Administration and Maintenance mechanism for

MPLS-TP networks(G.tpoam)
G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
G.8121.1 Characteristics of MPLS-TP equipment functional blocks

supporting G.8113.1/Y.1373.1
G.8121.2 Characteristics of MPLS-TP equipment functional blocks

supporting G.8113.2/Y.1373.2
G.8131 Linear protection switching for MPLS transport profile(MPLS-TP)

network
G.8151 Management aspects of the MPLS-TP network element
G.8152 Requirements and Analysis for protocol-neutral Information Model

of Transport Multi-Protocol Label Switching (T-MPLS) for
Network Element Management
G.8261 Timing and Synchronization aspects in Packet Networks
G.8262 Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave

clock (EEC)
G.8264 The Recommendation specifies the Synchronization Status

Message protocol and formats for use with Synchronous Ethernet.
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.356 B-ISDN ATM layer cell transfer performance
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification

I.371 Traffic control and congestion control in B-ISDN
I.610 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.630 ATM protection switching
M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal

equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange

circuits
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group
band circuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)

which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems
X.85 Link Access Procedure-SDH (LAPS)
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
Y.1291 An architectural framework for support of quality of service (QoS)

in packet networks
Y.1305 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
Y.1561 Performance and availability parameters for MPLS networks
Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks
Y.1730 Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and

Ethernet services
Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
Y.Sup4 Supplement on transport requirements for T-MPLS OAM and

considerations for the application of IETF MPLS technology
ITU-T M.20 Maintenance philosophy for telecommunications networks
ITU-T M.3000 Series Overview of TMN Recommendations
ITU-T Q.921 ISDN user-network interface layer 3 specification for basic call
control. This Recommendation is also included but not published in
I series under alias number I.451

ITU-T Q.931 ISDN user-network interface - Data link layer specification. This
Recommendation is published with the double number Q.921 and I.
441
ITU-T X.21 Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-
terminating Equipment for synchronous operation on public data
networks
ISO 9001 Quality systems - Model for quality assurance in design,

development, production,installation and servicing
14.2 IEEE Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the IEEE standards.
Table 14-2 IEEE standards

Standard Description
IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks — Amendment 4: Provider

bridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1AX Local and metropolitan area networks-Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1p Traffic Class Expediting and Dynamic Multicast Filtering
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.1s Local and metropolitan area networks, Virtual Bridged Local Area
Networks
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1v VLAN Classification by Protocol and Port
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ab Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications - Physical Layer
Parameters and Specifications for 1000 Mb/s Operation over 4 pair
of Category 5 Balanced Copper Cabling, Type 1000BASE-T
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and
management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation

IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium
attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type
100BASE-T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for
802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, repeater
and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
IEEE 1588 Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for

Networked Measurement and Control Systems
IEC 60870-5-101 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems—Part 5: Transmission

Protocols-Section 101: Companion Standard for Basic Telecontrol
Tasks
14.3 IETF Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the IETF standards.
Table 14-3 IETF Standards

RFC 0826 Ethernet address resolution protocol
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1757 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information

Base
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2212 Specification of guaranteed quality of service
RFC 2309 Recommendations on Queue Management and

Congestion Avoidance in the Internet
RFC 2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field(DS Field)

in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers
RFC 2475 An architecture for differentiated services
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-

IDENTITIES for ATM management
RFC 2597 Assured Forwarding PHB Group

RFC 2598 An Expedited Forwarding PHB
RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation

Layer 5
RFC 2697 A Single Rate Three Color Marker
RFC 2698 A Two Rate Three Color Marker
RFC 2702 Requirements for Traffic Engineering over MPLS
RFC 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information

Base
RFC 2865 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)
RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding
RFC 3140 Per hop behavior identification codes
RFC 3246 An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
RFC 3270 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of

Differentiated Services
RFC 3443 Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label

switching (MPLS) networks
RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time Applications
RFC 3644 Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
RFC 3670 Information model for describing network device QoS

datapath mechanisms
RFC 3916 Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge

(PWE3)
RFC 3985 Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)

Architecture
RFC 4197 Requirements for Edge-to-Edge Emulation of Time

Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuits over Packet
Switching Networks
RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for

Multiprotocol label switched (MPLS) networks
RFC 4378 A framework for Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS)

operations and management (OAM)
RFC 4385 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control

word for use over an MPLS PSN

RFC 4446 IANA Allocations for Pseudowire Edge to Edge

Emulation (PWE3)
RFC 4448 Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over

MPLS networks
RFC 4541 Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol

(IGMP) and Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)
Snooping Switches
RFC 4553 Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

over Packet (SAToP)
RFC 4664 Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks

(L2VPNs)
RFC 4717 Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Asynchronous

Transfer Mode (ATM) over MPLS Networks
RFC 4720 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) frame

check sequence retention
RFC 4816 Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Transparent Cell
Transport Service
RFC 5085 Pseudowire Virtual Circuit Connectivity Verification

(VCCV): A Control Channel for Pseudowires
RFC 5086 Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM)

Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched
Network (CESoPSN)
RFC 5254 Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation

Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
RFC 5317 Joint Working Team(JWT) Report on MPLS

Architectural Considerations for a Transport Profile
RFC 5462 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Stack

Entry: "EXP" Field Renamed to "Traffic Class" Field
RFC 5586 MPLS Generic Associated Channel
RFC 5654 Requirements of an MPLS Transport Profile
RFC 5659 An Architecture for Multi-Segment Pseudowire

Emulation Edge-to-Edge
RFC 5860 Requirements for Operations, Administration, and

Maintenance (OAM) in MPLS Transport Networks
RFC 5921 A Framework for MPLS in Transport Networks
RFC 5950 Network Management Framework for MPLS-based

Transport Networks

RFC 5951 Network Management Requirements for MPLS-based

Transport Networks
RFC 5960 MPLS Transport Profile Data Plane Architecture
RFC 6215 MPLS Transport Profile User-to-Network and Network-

to-Network Interfaces
RFC 6291 Guidelines for the Use of the "OAM" Acronym in the
IETF
RFC 6370 MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) Identifiers
RFC 6371 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

Framework for MPLS-Based Transport Networks
RFC 6372 MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) Survivability

Framework
RFC 6423 Using the Generic Associated Channel Label for

Pseudowire in the MPLS
RFC 6671 Allocation of a Generic Associated Channel Type for

ITU-T MPLS Transport Profile Operation, Maintenance,
and Administration (MPLS-TP OAM)
RFC 6723 Update of the Pseudowire Control-Word Negotiation

Mechanism
RFC 4717 (draft-ietf-pwe3- Encapsulation Methods for Transport of ATM Over

atm-encap) MPLS Networks
RFC 4816 (draft-ietf-pwe3- PWE3 ATM Transparent Cell Transport Service

cell-transport)
RFC 4385 (draft-ietf-pwe3-cw) Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Control

Word for Use over an MPLS PSN
RFC 4448 (draft-ietf-pwe3- Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Ethernet Over

ethernet-encap) MPLS Networks
RFC 5085 (draft-ietf-pwe3- Pseudowire Virtual Circuit Connectivity Verification

vccv) (VCCV): A Control Channel for Pseudowires
draft-ietf-mpls-tp-itu-t- MPLS-TP Identifiers Following ITU-T Conventions

identifiers-06
draft-zulr-mpls-tp-linear- Linear Protection Switching in MPLS-TP

protection-switching
draft-bhh-mpls-tp-oam- MPLS-TP OAM based on Y.1731

y1731-08

14.4 ANSI Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the ANSI related standards.
Table 14-4 ANSI related standards
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
14.5 Environment Related Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the environment related standards.
Table 14-5 Environment related standards
ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 Environmental Engineering (EE)

Environmental conditions and environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment
Part 1-1: Classification of environmental conditions: Storage
Class 1.1: Weatherprotected, partly temperature-controlled storage
locations
Class 1.2: Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage
locations

Part 1-2: Classification of environmental conditions:
Transportation
Class 2.1: Very careful transportation
Class 2.2: Careful transportation

Part 1-3: Classification of environmental conditions: Stationary
use at weatherprotected locations
Class 3.1: Temperature-controlled locations
Class 3.2: Partly temperature-controlled location
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures

IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake

vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification

of groups of environmental parameters and their severities -
Section 1: Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification

of groups of environmental parameters and their severities -
Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETSI EN 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE)

Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
NEBS GR-63-CORE Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:

Physical Protection
ROHS Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substance in electrical

and electronic equipment.
ETSI EN 300 019-2-3 Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and

environmental tests for telecommunications equipment Part 2-3:
Specification of environmental tests Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations
14.6 EMC Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the EMC related standards.
Table 14-6 EMC related standards
EN 50121-4 Railway applications-Electromagnetic Compatibility-Part 4:

Emission and immunity of the signalling and
telecommunications apparatus
IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and

EN 61000-4-2 measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and

EN 61000-4-3 measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test

EN 61000-4-4 measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity
test

EN 61000-4-5 measurement techniques-Surge immunity test


EN 61000-4-6 measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances,
induced by radio-frequency fields

EN 61000-4-29 measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and
voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance

characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity charateristics-

Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of
service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300127 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters

(ERM); Radiated emission testing of physically large
telecommunication systems
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications

equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
14.7 Safety Compliance Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the safety compliance related standards.
Table 14-7 Safety compliance related standards
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical

business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No Audio, video and similar electronic equipment

1-M94
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No Safety of information technology equipment

950-95
73/23/EEC Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment

IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety
EG 201 212 Electrical safety; Classification of interfaces for equipment to be

connected to telecommunication networks
ITU-T G.644 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
EN 60825-1/EN Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and

60825-2/ requirements Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical
IEC60825-1/ fibre communication systems
IEC60825-2
EN 41003/IEC 41003 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to

telecommunications networks and/or a cable distribution system
14.8 Protection Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the protection related standards.
Table 14-8 Protection related standards

IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I:

general principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and

measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to

overvoltages and overcurrents
ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication

building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to

surge overvoltages
14.9 Packet Standards

The OptiX OSN equipment complies with the packet related standards.

Table 14-9 Packet related standards

ITU-T G.7043 Virtual concatenation of plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

signals
ITU-T G.8010 Architecture of Ethernet layer networks
ITU-T G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1 Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2 Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.8011.3 Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Service
ITU-T G.8011.4 Ethernet virtual private rooted multipoint service
ITU-T G.8011.5 Ethernet private LAN service
ITU-T G.8012 Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI
ITU-T G.8012.1 Interfaces for the Ethernet Transport Network
ITU-T G.8021 Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment functional

blocks
ITU-T G.8040 GFP frame mapping into Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH)
ITU-T G.8101 Terms and definitions for MPLS transport profile
ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1 Architecture of the Multi-Protocol Label Switching transport profile

layer network
ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8113.1 Operations, Administration and Maintenance mechanism for MPLS-

TP networks(G.tpoam)
ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8121.1 Characteristics of MPLS-TP equipment functional blocks supporting

G.8113.1/Y.1373.1
ITU-T G.8131 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
ITU-T G.8151 Management aspects of the MPLS-TP network element
ITU-T G.8152 Requirements and Analysis for protocol-neutral Information Model of

Transport Multi-Protocol Label Switching (T-MPLS) for Network
Element Management
ITU-T G.8261 Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks
ITU-T G.8262 Timing characteristics of synchronous ethernet equipment slave clock

(EEC)

ITU-T G.8264 Timing distribution through packet networks
ITU-T I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
ITU-T I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
ITU-T I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
ITU-T I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
ITU-T I.356 B-ISDN ATM layer cell transfer performance
ITU-T I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification
ITU-T I.371 Traffic control and congestion control in B-ISDN
ITU-T I.610 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
ITU-T I.630 ATM protection switching
ITU-T Y.1291 An architectural framework for support of quality of service (QoS) in

packet networks
ITU-T Y.1561 Performance and availability parameters for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1730 Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and
Ethernet services
ITU-T Y.1731/G. OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
8013
Y.Sup4 Supplement on transport requirements for T-MPLS OAM and

considerations for the application of IETF MPLS technology
IETF RFC 0826 Ethernet address resolution protocol
IETF RFC 1661 The Point-to-Point Protocol(PPP)
IETF RFC 1662 PPP in HDLC-like Framing
IETF RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
IETF RFC 2212 Specification of guaranteed quality of service
IETF RFC 2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field(DS Field) in the IPv4
and IPv6 Headers
IETF RFC 2475 An architecture for differentiated services
IETF RFC 2597 Assured forwarding PHB group
IETF RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5

IETF RFC 2697 A single rate three color marker
IETF RFC 2698 A Two Rate Three Color Marker
IETF RFC 2702 Requirements for traffic engineering over MPLS
IETF RFC 3031 MPLS architecture
IETF RFC 3032 MPLS label stack encoding
IETF RFC 3140 Per hop behavior identification codes
IETF RFC 3246 An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
IETF RFC 3270 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of Differentiated

Service
IETF RFC 3443 Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching
(MPLS) networks
IETF RFC 3644 Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
IETF RFC 3670 Information model for describing network device QoS datapath
mechanisms
IETF RFC 3916 Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
IETF RFC 3985 Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Architecture
IETF RFC 4197 Requirements for edge-to-edge emulation of time division multiplexed
(TDM) circuits over packet switching networks
IETF RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for Multiprotocol
label switched (MPLS) networks
IETF RFC 4378 A framework for Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) operations
and management (OAM)
IETF RFC 4385 Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Control Word for Use
over an MPLS PSN
IETF RFC 4446 IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
IETF RFC 4447 Pseudowire Setup and Maintenance Using the Label Distribution
Protocol (LDP)
IETF RFC 4448 Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks
IETF RFC 4541 Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) and
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping Switches
IETF RFC 4553 Structure-agnostic time division multiplexing (TDM) over packet
(SAToP)
IETF RFC 4664 Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs)

IETF RFC 4717 Definitions of Textual Conventions and Object-identities for ATM
Management
IETF RFC 4720 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) frame check sequence
retention
IETF RFC 4816 Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Asynchronous Transfer

Mode (ATM) Transparent Cell Transport Service
IETF RFC 5085 Pseudowire Virtual Circuit Connectivity Verification (VCCV): A

Control Channel for Pseudowires
IETF RFC 5086 Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation
Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN)
IETF RFC 5254 Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge

(PWE3)
IETF RFC 5462 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Stack Entry: "EXP"
Field Renamed to "Traffic Class" Field
IETF RFC 5586 MPLS Generic Associated Channel
IETF RFC 5654 Requirements of an MPLS Transport Profile
IETF RFC 5659 An Architecture for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-

Edge
IETF RFC 5860 Requirements for OAM in MPLS Transport Networks
IETF RFC 5921 A Framework for MPLS in Transport Networks
IETF RFC 5950 Network Management Framework for MPLS-based Transport

Networks
IETF RFC 5951 Network Management Requirements for MPLS-based Transport

Networks
IETF RFC 5960 MPLS Transport Profile Data Plane Architecture
IETF RFC 6215 MPLS Transport Profile User-to-Network and Network-to-Network

Interfaces
IETF RFC 6291 Guidelines for the Use of the "OAM" Acronym in the IETF
IETF RFC 6370 MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) Identifiers
IETF RFC 6371 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Framework for MPLS-
Based Transport Networks
IETF RFC 6423 Using the Generic Associated Channel Label for Pseudowire in the
MPLS
IETF RFC 6671 Allocation of a Generic Associated Channel Type for ITU-T MPLS
Transport Profile Operation, Maintenance, and Administration
(MPLS-TP OAM)

IETF RFC 6723 Update of the Pseudowire Control-Word Negotiation Mechanism
draft-ietf-mpls-tp- MPLS-TP Identifiers Following ITU-T Conventions

itu-t-
identifiers-06
draft-zulr-mpls- Linear Protection Switching in MPLS-TP

tp-linear-
protection-
switching
IEEE 802.1d Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks
IEEE 802.1p LAN Layer 2 QoS/CoS Protocol for Traffic Prioritization
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconvergence of Spanning Tree (RSTP)
IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3ab Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications - Physical Layer
Parameters and Specifications for 1000 Mb/s Operation over 4 pair of
Category 5 Balanced Copper Cabling, Type 1000BASE-T
IEEE 802.1AX Local and metropolitan area networks - Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Support to extend the IEEE 802.3 protocol and MAC specification to
an operating speed of 10 Gb/s.
IEEE 802.3ag Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks — Amendment 5: Connectivity

Fault Management
IEEE 802.3ah Ethernet First Mile
IEEE 802.3u Media Access Control (MAC) Parameters, Physical Layer, Medium
Attachment Units, and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation, Type
100BASE-T (Clauses 21–30)
IEEE 802.3x Flow control and Back pressure
IEEE 802.3z Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers, Repeater and
Management Parameters for 1,000 Mb/s Operation
IEEE 1588 Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for

Networked Measurement and Control Systems
MEF 4 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic

Framework
MEF 6 Ethernet Services Definitions - Phase I

MEF 9 Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI
MEF 10 Ethernet Services Attributes Phase 1
MEF 11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework
MEF 12 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 2: Ethernet

Services Layer
MEF 13 User Network Interface (UNI) Type 1 Implementation Agreement
MEF 14 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1
AF- AF-PHY-0086.001 Inverse Multiplexing for ATM Specification

PHY-0086.001 Version 1.1
AF-TM-0121.000 Traffic Management Specification
IEEE 802.1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol

Product Description A Glossary
A Glossary
Numerics
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
1+1 backup A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active
component goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active
component to ensure that the system service is not interrupted.
1+1 hot standby A backup mode in which two systems with the same functions are deployed, one in
the active state and the other in the standby state with power on. The standby system
backs up the data of the active system automatically. Once the active system
encounters a fault, the standby system takes over services from the active system
automatically or by manual intervention.
1000BASE-T An Ethernet specification that uses the twisted pair cable with the transmission speed
as 1000 Mbit/s and the transmission distance as 100 meters.
10BASE-T An Ethernet specification that uses the twisted pair cable with the transmission speed
as 10 Mbit/s and the transmission distance as 100 meters.
2DM two-way delay measurement
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s
to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over
private VLANs.
A
A/D analog/digit

AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.

AAL See ATM Adaptation Layer.
ABR See available bit rate.
AC alternating current
ACH associated channel header
ACL See access control list.
ACR allowed cell rate
ADM add/drop multiplexer
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line.
AF See assured forwarding.
AIS alarm indication signal
AIS insertion Insertion of AIS in a channel with excessive errors to indicate that it is unavailable.
For a line board, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in
the B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For tributary board at the E1/T1 level, it can be set whether
to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For tributary board at the E3
level or higher, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in
the B3 byte.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AMI See alternate mark inversion.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
API See application programming interface.
APID access point identifier
APS automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit.
ASON automatically switched optical network
ATD attribute discovery
ATM See automatic teller machine.
ATM Adaptation An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Layer (AAL) (ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types
of information, including voice, video, and data.
ATPC See automatic transmit power control.
AUG See administrative unit group.
Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.

Authentication, A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security

Authorization and services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related
Accounting (AAA) network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users
according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the
consumption of network services by users.
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
administrative unit One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM
group (AUG) payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
aging time The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
alarm cascading The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.
alarm indication A mechanism to indicate the alarm status of equipment. On the cabinet of an NE, four
differently-colored indicators specify the current status of the NE. When the green
indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm
has been generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm has been
generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm has been generated. The
ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the
board.
alarm masking A method to mask alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are masked
are not displayed on the NMS or the NMS does not monitor unimportant alarms.
alarm suppression A method to suppress alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are
suppressed are no longer reported from NEs.
alternate mark A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent
inversion (AMI) logical 1 values.
application An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications
programming interface that are used for communication between software programs.
(API)
application-specific A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
integrated circuit the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
(ASIC) By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable
for many needs.
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short
delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For
traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues
to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.
asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing
subscriber line (ADSL) phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL
provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that
it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to
receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog
(voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data
rates from 512 kbit/s to about 6 Mbit/s.
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
shutdown (ALS) transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic teller An automatic teller machine or automated teller machine (ATM) is an electronic
machine (ATM) device which allows a bank's customers to make cash withdrawals and check their
account balances at any time without the need for a human teller. Many ATMs also
allow people to deposit cash or checks, transfer money between their bank accounts or
even buy postage stamps.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal
power control (ATPC) detected at the receiver
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
(ABR) forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
(APD) Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA booster amplifier
BA2 2 x booster amplifier
BBE background block error
BC boundary clock
BCD binary coded decimal
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BEI backward error indication
BER See basic encoding rule.
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIAE backward incoming alignment error
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BNC See Bayonet-Neill-Concelman.
BOM bill of materials
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.

BPS board protection switching

BRA See basic rate access.
BRAS See broadband remote access server.
BSC binary synchronous communication
BTS base transceiver station
BTV broadband TV
BWS backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
Bayonet-Neill- A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
Concelman (BNC)
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system
regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take
actions to recover the faulty link.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backup A collection of data stored on (usually removable) non-volatile storage media for
purposes of recovery in case the original copy of data is lost or becomes inaccessible;
also called a backup copy. To be useful for recovery, a backup must be made by
copying the source data image when it is in a consistent state. The act of creating a
backup.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
basic encoding rule A rule in the syntax structure of the ASN.1, which describes how data is represented
(BER) during transmission.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the
computer.
basic rate access An ISDN interface typically used by smaller sites and customers. This interface
(BRA) consists of a single 16 kbit/s data (or "D") channel plus two bearer (or "B") channels
for voice and/or data. Also known as Basic Rate Access, or BRI.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of
the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the
time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter,
packet loss ratio, and high reliability.

bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
(BIP) an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit
of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-
bit sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by
setting the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition
of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
(BIP-8) transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one
byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of
"1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the
number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bound path A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data
throughput capacity.
bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a
unit (BPDU) spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports,
addresses, priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended
destination. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. These loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as
services digital voice. It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based
network (B-ISDN) circuits at 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband remote A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
access server (BRAS) networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of
network to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of
multiple services, meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth
utilization of different users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to
a broadband network.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range
is determined by the broadcast address.
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply (BITS) a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
built-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to
the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths
directly.
burst A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the
block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast
sending.
bus A path or channel for signal transmission. The typical case is that, the bus is an
electrical connection that connects one or more conductors. All devices that are
connected to a bus, can receive all transmission contents simultaneously.

C
CAC See connection admission control.
CAPEX capital expenditure
CAR committed access rate
CAS See channel associated signaling.
CAU See client automatic upgrade.
CBS See committed burst size.
CCI connection control interface
CCITT Consultative Committee of International Telegraph and Telephone
CCM continuity check message
CCS See Common Channel Signaling.
CDMA2000 A 3G technology developed by Qualcomm of the US. Technology competitive with
WCDMA, upgraded from CDMA1, and developed by the GSM community as a
worldwide standard for 3G mobile.
CDVT cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CF compact flash
CFM connectivity fault management
CFR cell fill rate
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR committed information rate
CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLEI common language equipment identification
CLK clock board
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLP See cell loss priority.
CMEP connection monitoring end point
CMI coded mark inversion
CMR cell misinsertion ratio
CR connection request
CR-LDP Constraint-based Routed Label Distribution Protocol
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.

CRC-4 multiframe A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of
timeslot 0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in principle
and implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM frames. Each CRC-4
multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a
CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits. Bits C1 to C4 of a check block
can check the previous check block.
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
CST See common spanning tree.
CTP connection termination point
CV connectivity verification
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
CoS class of service
Common Channel A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information
Signaling (CCS) from user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling
information for all other channels in the system.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
called number The number dialed by the subscriber to originate a call.
carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which:
detection (CSMA/CD)
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped
if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is
unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be
dropped.
channel associated A signaling system in which signaling information is transmitted within a dedicated
signaling (CAS) voice channel. China Signaling System No. 1 is a type of CAS signaling.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At
service (CES) the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These
ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception
end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots.
The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to
the original sequence at the reception end.

client automatic A function that enables a user to automatically detect the update of the client version
upgrade (CAU) and upgrade the client. This keeps the version of the client is the same as that of the
server.
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
(CWDM) not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of
an IP packet to be forwarded.
common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST
(CST) region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their
spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP.
congestion Extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreased network service
efficiency.
connection admission A control process in which the network takes actions in the call set-up phase (or call
control (CAC) re-negotiation phase) to determine which connection request is admitted.
cross-connection The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between
line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections
of NEs.
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly
connecting to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or
host.
cyclic redundancy A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
check (CRC) complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the
transmission is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy
check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-
checking values.
D
D/A digital-analog converter
DAPI destination access point identifier
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
(with ground) (DC-C) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line
between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
ground) (DC-I) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the
PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric
equipment.

DCD data carrier detect

DCE See data circuit-terminating equipment.
DCF data communication function
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network.
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch dual in-line package switch
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DMM delay measurement message
DMR delay measurement reply
DNI dual node interconnection
DRDB dynamic random database
DRR dynamic rate repartitioning
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP digital signal processing
DSR data set ready
DSS door status switch
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency.
DTR data terminal ready
DVB See digital video broadcasting.
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
DiffServ See differentiated service.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
Configuration Protocol parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires
(DHCP) to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating
IP addresses to hosts.

data circuit- The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data
terminating equipment terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE
(DCE) may be separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment.
The DCE may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end
of the line.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.
data terminal A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the
equipment (DTE) DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced
by DCE.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source
node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
dense wavelength The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
division multiplexing attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific
(DWDM) frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously
in the same fiber.
differentiated service An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits
and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It
is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to
ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP
value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB).
Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital data network A data transmission network that is designed to transmit data on digital channels (such
(DDN) as the fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel).
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections
(DSLAM) and uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
digital video A suite of internationally accepted open standards for digital television. DVB
broadcasting (DVB) standards are maintained by the DVB Project, an international industry consortium
with more than 300 members, and they are published by a Joint Technical Committee
(JTC) of European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) and European
Broadcasting Union (EBU).
dispersion The maximum error of the local clock compared with the reference clock.
dispersion A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
compensation module dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
(DCM)
distributed link A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and
aggregation group negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or
(DLAG) hardware failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board,
thereby achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.

downstream In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the
link.
dual tone multiple Multi-frequency signaling technology for telephone systems. According to this
frequency (DTMF) technology, standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one
from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four high
frequencies, are used.
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree.
E2E end to end
EBS See excess burst size.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEC Ethernet Electric Interface PMC Card
EEPROM See electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFCI explicit forward congestion indication
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EFM OAM Ethernet in the first mile OAM
EIA See Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EPD early packet discard
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.

Electronic Industries An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various electronics
Alliance (EIA) manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232-C, for example, is
the EIA standard for connecting serial components.
EoD See Ethernet over dual domains.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable
and easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s,
1000 Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
(E-Aggr) connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet over dual A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet
domains (EoD) service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethernet passive A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access
optical network technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It
(EPON) supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance
of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on
encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the
bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high
bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet-tree (E-Tree) An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet virtual
connection.
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
Expires A header field of the SIP message. It specifies the duration after which the message or
message content expires.
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable

egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs
after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission
channel (ESC) of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
programmable read- storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming.
only memory EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be
(EEPROM) reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out.
electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP
inside IP.
encryption A function used to transform data so as to hide its information content to prevent it's
unauthorized use.
enterprise system A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
connection (ESCON) Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates
a rate of 200 Mbit/s.
erbium-doped fiber An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
amplifier (EDFA) doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump
laser are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting
with doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it
amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode,
traffic control is achieved by token buckets C and E. The excess burst size parameter
defines the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when
the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must
be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be
forwarded.
excess information rate The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the
(EIR) actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
exercise switching An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly.
The protection switching is not really performed.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
(EF) demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to
(EXP) identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.

F
FAS frame alignment signal
FC See Fibre Channel.
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FCS frame check sequence
FDD See frequency division duplex.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.
FDI packet See forward defect indication packet.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FE fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection
FIB See forwarding information base.
FICON See Fibre Connect.
FIFO See first in first out.
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FPS See fast protection switching.
FR See frame relay.
FRR See fast reroute.
FRU See field replaceable unit.
FTN FEC to NHLFE
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on
networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
Fibre Connect A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units.
(FICON) It carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fibre channel,
and provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast protection A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the working
switching (FPS) PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the sink receives
the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the interworking
function (IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services.

fast reroute (FRR) A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of
a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an
active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active
route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the
traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN
FRR, and TE FRR.
fault alarm A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure,
or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be
cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher
severity than event alarms.
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies
many of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate
arrays.
field replaceable unit "A unit or component of a system that is designed to be replaced in the field, i.e.,
(FRU) without returning the system to a factory or repair depot. Field replaceable units may
either be customer-replaceable or their replacement may require trained service
personnel."
firewall A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network
security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the
firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network
as much as possible to protect the network security.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read
and invoked first.
forced switching The action of switching traffic signals between a working channel and protection
channel. The switching occurs even if the channel to which traffic is being switched is
faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that
indication (FDI) first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its
location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level
client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward defect A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms of
indication packet (FDI the upper layer network where failure has occurred.
packet)
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
forwarding A table that provides information for network hardware (bridges and routers) for them
information base (FIB) to forward data packets to other networks. The information contained in a routing
table differs according to whether it is used by a bridge or a router. A bridge relies on
both the source (originating) and destination addresses to determine where and how to
forward a packet.

frame delay variation A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
(FDV) where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the
number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of
service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service
frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length
packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent
virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake
of speed.
frequency division An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the
duplex (FDD) uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts.
Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
fuse A safety device that protects an electric circuit from excessive current, consisting of or
containing a metal element that melts when current exceeds a specific amperage,
thereby opening the circuit.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
G.711 Audio codec standard (A-law or U-law) that uses pulse code modulation (PCM). Its
data rate is 64 kbit/s.
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GCP GMPLS control plan
GCRA generic cell rate algorithm
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFC generic flow control
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GR See graceful restart.
GRE See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM See Global system for mobile communications.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Framing A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is
Procedure (GFP) defined by ITU-T G.7041.

Generic Routing A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network.
Encapsulation (GRE) GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE
serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently
transmitting data packets.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System (GPS) timing services to users worldwide.
Global system for The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by the European
mobile Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
communications global mobile phone networks. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching
(GSM) subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gain The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the
optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper
fiber, which expressed in dB.
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
graceful restart (GR) In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/
MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-Intermediate
System (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP),
and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwarding
is not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the
protocols at the control plane when the system performs an active/standby switchover.
This series of standards is called graceful restart.
H
HCS higher order connection supervision
HD-SDI high definition serial digital interface
HDB3 See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDTV See high definition television.
HEC See header error control.
HPA higher order path adaptation
HPT higher order path termination
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
HUAWEI Electronic The software used to view, search for, and upgrade electronic documentation of
Document Explorer Huawei products. HedEx, pronounced as [hediks], has two editions, HedEx Lite and
(HedEx) HedEx Server.
HedEx See HUAWEI Electronic Document Explorer.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the
Packet Access requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It
(HSDPA) enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without
changing the WCDMA network topology.

header error control A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the
(HEC) cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in
the first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
service (HQoS) to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and
the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the
bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high definition A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
television (HDTV) active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high density bipolar of A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The
order 3 code (HDB3) HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct
current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive
zeros.
I
IAE incoming alignment error
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICC See ITU carrier code.
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ICP IMA Control Protocol
IDU See indoor unit.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol.
ILM incoming label map
IMA frame A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive
cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP See Internet service provider.

IST internal spanning tree

ITC independent transmit clock
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU carrier code (ICC) A code assigned to a network operator/service provider, maintained by the ITU-T
Telecommunication Standardization Bureau (TSB).
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Interior Gateway A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-
Protocol (IGP) sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing
information protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the
enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
Numbers Authority allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA
(IANA) also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite,
including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol
Management Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and
(IGMP) maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
television (IPTV) streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the
media streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to
the terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after
media streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers
together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host
within the network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits
while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
provider (ISP)

indoor unit (IDU) The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
adjustment (IPA) regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured
by the laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in
properly.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
(IF) signal.
J
jitter The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations,
and control system instability.
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.
L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPD link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LBM See loopback message.
LBR See loopback reply.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCD liquid crystal display
LCK See Locked signal function.
LCN local communications network
LCT local craft terminal
LER See label edge router.
LIFO See last in first out.
LIU logical interface unit
LLC See logical link control.

LLID local loopback ID

LM See loss measurement.
LMP link management protocol
LOC loss of continuity
LOM loss of multiframe
LOP loss of pointer
LOS See loss of signal.
LP lower order path
LPA lower order path adaptation
LPT link-state pass through
LSA link-state advertisement
LSR See label switching router.
LT linktrace
LTM See linktrace message.
LTR See linktrace reply.
LU line unit
LVDS See low voltage differential signal.
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch
transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC
address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called
Layer 2 switching.
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer,
(LCK) informs consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and
suppresses the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to
(LER) assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR
(LSR) is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible
for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table,
creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to
groups received in the label forwarding table.
last in first out (LIFO) A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it
were a single link.

link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member
links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity
initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path
is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP.
(LTM) LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply (LTR) For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM
minus 1.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few
(LAN) square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate.
Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run
at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the
(LLC) upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various
physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback message The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the
(LBM) destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply (LBR) A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the
destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the
LBM. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the
sending time of LBR.
loopback test Self-test of chips, including internal and external loopback. Loopback test is used to
test whether interfaces work normally.
loss measurement A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service
(LM) frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames
between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
low voltage differential A low noise, low power, low amplitude method for high-speed (gigabits per second)
signal (LVDS) data transmission over copper wire.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MBB mobile broadband
MCF message communication function
MCR minimum cell rate

MD See maintenance domain.

MD5 See message digest algorithm 5.
MDF See main distribution frame.
ME See maintenance entity.
MEG See maintenance entity group.
MEL maintenance entity group level
MEP maintenance association end point
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIB See management information base.
MIP maintenance association intermediate point
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MLT mechanized loop testing
MP maintenance point
MP3 See MPEG audio layer-3.
MPEG audio layer-3 A digital audio coding scheme used in distributing recorded music over the Internet.
(MP3) MP3 shrinks the size of an audio file by a factor of 10 to 12 without seriously
degrading the quality (CD-recording level) of the sound.
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS TP See Multiprotocol Label Switching traffic policing.
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP shared A protection switchover mechanism defined in the ITU-T G.8132 standard. A group
protection ring of nodes constitute a closed loop and each node is connected to two adjacent nodes
(SPRing) using a bidirectional channel. Ring network protection involves two rings that provide
protection for each other and are in opposite directions. Both of the two rings provide
working and protection channels and redundant bandwidth or network devices. In this
way, services can be automatically restored after the network does not function
properly or deteriorates.
MS multiplex section
MS-AIS See multiplex section alarm indication signal.
MS-PW See multi-segment pseudo wire.
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST See multiplex section termination.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.

MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MUX See multiplexer.
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of
(MAC) the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and
connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC
protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted,
certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control
information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving
data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the
data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted
correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is
transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this
case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.
The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning
trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN
because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
Tree region (MST them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region) region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different
Switching (MPLS) link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the
basis of IP routing and control protocols.
Multiprotocol Label It is a scheme that supervises the specific traffic entering the communication devices.
Switching traffic By policing the speed of traffic that enters the network, it "punishes" the traffic out of
policing (MPLS TP) the threshold, so the traffic going into network is limited to a reasonable range,
protecting the network resources and the interests of the carriers.
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame (MDF)
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by
(MD) connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are
managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of
(ME) a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
maintenance entity A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:
group (MEG)
l Exist within the same management edges.
l Have the same MEG hierarchy.
l Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such
(MIB) as routers and switches) in a network.

manual switching The action of manually switching traffic signals between a working channel and a
protection channel. Manual switching fails if the channel to which traffic is being
switched is faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.
mean time between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
(MTTR)
message digest A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
algorithm 5 (MD5) integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
mirroring The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several
computers with identical data.
multi-segment pseudo A collection of multiple adjacent PW segments. Each PW segment is a point-to-point
wire (MS-PW) PW. The use of MS-PWs to bear services saves tunnel resources and can transport
services over different networks.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a
multicast group rather than a host.
multicast listener A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery (MLD) connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On
IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router
to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related
groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
signal (MFAS) always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to
establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a
instance (MSTI) simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a
VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be
assigned to multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section An all-ONES characteristic or adapted information signal. It's generated to replace the
alarm indication signal normal traffic signal when it signal contains a defect condition in order to prevent
(MS-AIS) consequential downstream failures being declared or alarms being raised. AIS can be
identified as multiplex section alarm indication signal.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between
protection (MSP) and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to
a "protection" channel.
multiplex section A function that generates the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) during the
termination (MST) formation of an SDH frame signal and that terminates the MSOH in the reverse
direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate
channels being fixed.

multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
multiprotocol label An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol
switching virtual label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network
private network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines
(MPLS VPN) traditional routing technology and label switching technology. It can be used to
construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
NAS network access server
NDF new data flag
NE network element
NEBS Network Equipment Building System
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NLP normal link pulse
NM network management
NMI network maintenance interface
NNI network-to-network interface
NPC See network parameter control.
NPE network provider edge
NRT-VBR non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ non-return to zero
NRZ code non-return-to-zero code
NRZI non-return to zero inverted
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory
network parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each
control (NPC) virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded,
measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is
that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according
to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network
interface.
network segment Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a
message broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the
segment.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made
point (NSAP) available to a Network service user by the Network service provider.

noise figure A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in
a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the
output noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in
the input termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise
figure is thus the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device
itself did not introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio
receiver can be specified.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
element (non-GNE) gateway NE application layer.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAM&P operation, administration, maintenance and provision
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAMS Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System
OAU See optical amplifier unit.
OC ordinary clock
OCS optical core switching
OCh optical channel with full functionality
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit.
ODUk optical channel data unit - k
OHP overhead processing
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OOF out of frame
OOS out of service
OPEX operating expense
OPS optical physical section
OPU See optical channel payload unit.
OPUk optical channel payload unit - k
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI open systems interconnection
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.

OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.

OSPF-TE Open Shortest Path First-Traffic Engineering
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTN optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section.
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
offset Defines the start position of the data part to be inspected in a packet or a stream. The
value of the offset cannot be greater than the maximum stream length. Packet offset
applies to every packet in every stream; stream offset applies to the first packet of
every stream.
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification,
administration and location, and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
optical add/drop A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one
multiplexer (OADM) channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier unit A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be
(OAU) used in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. An optical attenuator is
used to ensure that the optical power of a signal at the receive end is not excessively
high.
optical channel A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for
payload unit (OPU) multiple services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and
lowering costs.
optical network A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
terminal (ONT)
optical network unit A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
(ONU) signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
ratio (OSNR) important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
optical supervisory A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
channel (OSC) nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and
reflectometer (OTDR) measures the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length
and light loss, and to locate fiber faults.
optical transmission A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS
section (OTS) allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between
NEs.

optical transponder A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
unit (OTU) compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU) The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PA power amplifier
PADR PPPoE active discovery request
PBX private branch exchange
PC personal computer
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCI See peripheral component interconnect.
PCM See pulse code modulation.
PCN product change notice
PCR See peak cell rate.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PET polyester
PGND cable A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PHP penultimate hop popping
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMU power monitoring unit
PNNI private network-node interface
POH path overhead
PON passive optical network
POTS See plain old telephone service.

PPD partial packet discard

PPI PDH physical interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS port protection switching
PQ See priority queuing.
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network.
PSU See power supply unit.
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PVC See permanent virtual circuit.
PVID See port VLAN ID.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
PWR power cable
packet discarding A function of discarding the packets from unknown VLAN domain or broadcast
packets. Packet Discarding is used to prevent the situation where unknown packets or
broadcast packets use the bandwidth on a link, improving the reliability of service
transmission.
packet loss The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot
accept any incoming data at a given moment.
packet per second Packet per second though the network card. Unit of data service bandwidth.
(pps)
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits,
usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd
or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the
transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and
attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity
error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
peak cell rate (PCR) The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.

per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network
should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the
IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding
(EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result
reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system
generates a performance alarm.
peripheral component A standard designed for the bus connecting the computer main board to peripheral
interconnect (PCI) devices. The PCI1.0 standard was released by Intel in 1992 and related standards have
been released by PCI-SIG since 1993. Peripheral component interconnect (PCI)
delivers I/O functionality for computers ranging from servers to workstations, PCs,
laptop PCs and mobile devices.
permanent virtual A circuit that can be established as an option to provide a dedicated circuit link
circuit (PVC) between two facilities. PVC configuration is usually preconfigured by the service
provider. Unlike SVCs, PVCs are usually very seldom broken/disconnected. A
permanent virtual circuit (PVC) is a virtual circuit established for repeated/continuous
use between the same DTE. In a PVC, the long-term association is identical to the data
transfer phase of a virtual call. Permanent virtual circuits eliminate the need for
repeated call set-up and clearing.
permanent virtual Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
path (PVP)
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop
filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with
the incoming or reference frequency.
ping test A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP
address on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists
according to the data packet of the same size returned from the target host.
plain old telephone The basic telephone service provided through the traditional cabling such as twisted
service (POTS) pair cables.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the
hierarchy (PDH) minimum rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
(P2P) terminal users.
port VLAN ID (PVID) A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame carries
no VLAN tag when reaching the port.
power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
(PDU)
power supply unit A unit that converts the external power input into the power supply for internal use.
(PSU) Power supply units are classified into AC power units and DC power units.
pps See packet per second.
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
(PCB) using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated
onto a non-conductive substrate.

priority queuing (PQ) A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ
algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower
latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets
of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are processed
earlier than others.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can
be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent
sequence (PRBS) of the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is
established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information
of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of
edge-to-edge (PWE3) a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched
network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time
division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates
to the real situation.
pulse code modulation A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of pulses.
(PCM) Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can change
continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several predefined
values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog, pulse code
modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth
period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four
dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can
perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the
minimum BER.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAI remote alarm indication
RAN See radio access network.
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
REI remote error indication

RFC See Requirement For Comments.

RGB red green blue
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RJ registered jack
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller.
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RPR resilient packet ring
RS regenerator section
RS232 See Recommended Standard 232.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and
others are the same as RS232.
RSL See received signal level.
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RSSI See received signal strength indicator.
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE See Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTN radio transmission node
RTS request to send
RTU See remote test unit.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Recommended A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals,
Standard 232 (RS232) and the physical size and pinout of connectors.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. As a distributed server/client system, RADIUS provides
(RADIUS) the AAA function.
Requirement For A document about standards, protocols, or other information pertaining to the
Comments (RFC) operation of the Internet. The RFC, under the control of the Internet Architecture
Board (IAB), is actually issued after discussion and serves as a standard document.
RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for
Protocol (RSVP) an integrated services Internet.

Resource Reservation An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in
Protocol-Traffic MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs
Engineering (RSVP- by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP
TE) rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a
Protocol (RIP) route based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a
distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its
neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the
(RAN) CN from wireless network.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP
synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
real-time variable bit A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP
rate (rt-VBR) (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),
sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source
device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
(RSL)
received signal The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
strength indicator receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
(RSSI) within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the
antenna
reference clock A stable and high-precision autonomous clock that provides frequencies as a reference
for other clocks.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
remote optical A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply
pumping amplifier and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power
(ROPA) compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
remote test unit (RTU) A subsystem capable of collecting, pre-processing, and sending data coming from the
field sensors to the SCU.
rt-VBR See real-time variable bit rate.
S
S-VLAN service virtual local area network
SAI service area identifier
SAPI source access point identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC square connector
SCR sustainable cell rate

SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.

SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SDP serious disturbance period
SEC security screening
SELT See single-ended loop test.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SEMF synchronous equipment management function
SES severely errored second
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SLA See service level agreement.
SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol.
SLM single longitudinal mode
SM section monitoring
SMB sub-miniature B
SMF See single-mode fiber.
SMSR side mode suppression ratio
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCMP subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple network management protocol.
SOH section overhead
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPC soft permanent connection
SPI SDH physical interface
SPRing See MPLS-TP shared protection ring.
SRG See shared risk group.
SRLG shared risk link group
SSH See Secure Shell.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB synchronization status message byte

SSRC synchronization source

SSU synchronization supply unit
STD system target decoder
STM See synchronous transport module.
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module level N
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
STelnet Secure Shell Telnet
SVC switched virtual connection
Secure File Transfer A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Protocol (SFTP)
Secure Shell (SSH) A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure
channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and
provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the
network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived
and simple passwords from being captured.
Serial Line Interface A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
Protocol (SLIP) transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host
interconnection function with a known IP address.
Simple network "An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing systems and devices in a network.
management protocol The data being monitored and managed is defined by a MIB. The functions supported
(SNMP) by the protocol are the request and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data, and
traps that signal the occurrence of events."
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing
Message (SSM) link. SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network
or synchronization network.
serial digital interface An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
(SDI)
service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
(SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.
shared risk group A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the
(SRG) failure of all the resources in the group.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
single-ended loop test An automated way of testing a DSL loop from one end of the line, providing operators
(SELT) with a method for efficiently evaluating their loop as part of their daily operational
practices.
single-mode fiber A type of optical fiber through which only one type of optical signal with a fixed wave
(SMF) length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber can transmit data over a long distance.

single-pair high-speed A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
digital subscriber line HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
(SHDSL) terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment.
standard definition- Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
steering A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-
based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH transoceanic multiplex section
protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the source and sink
nodes of a service.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers
network (SONET) to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle
multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84
Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
synchronous transport An information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It
module (STM) consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is
suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is
synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed
STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic
rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are
under consideration.
T
TAI tracking area identity
TC transmission convergence
TCI tag control information
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCN telecommunication network
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD transmit degrade
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDC tunable dispersion compensator
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch
TL1 Transaction Language 1

TLS Transport Layer Security

TLV See type-length-value.
TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOD time of day
TOS type of service
TPID tag protocol identifier
TPS See tributary protection switching.
TSD trail signal degrade
TST See Test.
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live.
TTSI See trail termination source identifier.
TU tributary unit
TUG tributary unit group
Test (TST) A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or out-of-service
diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput, frame loss, bit errors,
and so on.
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications
Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other
networks through the RNC.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate
(TM) signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high
rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
threshold A limitation on an amount, scale, or level. Changes will occur when a threshold is
reached.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,
service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with
bandwidth.
throughput capability The data input/output capability of the data transmission interface.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time
multiplexing (TDM) slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross
time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be
transmitted over one channel.

time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
tolerance Permissible degree of variation from a pre-set standard.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.
traceroute A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of
datagrams with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time
exceeded messages that return to determine routers along the path.
traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the
entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
trail termination A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the
source identifier connectivity verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it
(TTSI) matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect.
transmission delay The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when
the site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and
the equipment forwarding latency.
tributary protection A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary
switching (TPS) processing boards.
two rate three color An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two
marker (trTCM) rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether
it exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
type-length-value An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called
(TLV) Code-Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through
different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual
data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New
TLVs can be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing
information loaded in packets.
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS unavailable second
UAT See unavailable time event.
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UMC See Unified Menu Center.
UMTS See Universal Mobile Telecommunications System.
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module

UPS uninterruptible power supply

Unified Menu Center The Unified Menu Center provides menu information for handset customers and
(UMC) collects service parameters for customer transactions.
Universal Mobile A 3G mobile technology that will deliver broadband information at speeds up to 2
Telecommunications Mbit/s. Besides voice and data, UMTS will deliver audio and video to wireless
System (UMTS) devices anywhere in the world through fixed, wireless and satellite systems.
unavailable time event An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
(UAT) errored seconds.
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
upstream In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.
usage parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each
control (UPC) virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded,
measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is
that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according
to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network
interface.
user-to-network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
V.24 The physical layer interface specification between DTE and DCE defined by the ITU-
T. It complies with EIA/TIA-232.
V.35 The synchronous physical layer protocol defined by the ITU-T. It is used for
communication between network access devices and the packet-based network. V.35
is mainly used in America and Europe.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC trunk See virtual container trunk.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCI virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VDSL very-high-data-rate digital subscriber line
VDSL2 See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VIP very important person
VOA variable optical attenuator

VP See virtual path.

VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
VRF VPN routing and forwarding
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
Virtual Router A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
Redundancy Protocol routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
(VRRP) a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP
address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this
virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers
in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the
network.
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice
calls.
very-high-speed digital An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports
subscriber line 2 multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and
(VDSL2) high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection (VCC) point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple
end points.
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the
group (VCG) same virtual concatenation link.
virtual container trunk The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs.
(VC trunk)
virtual path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM
network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to
(VPI) which virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private wire A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
service (VPWS) Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voltage drop The voltage developed across a component or conductor by the flow of current
through the resistance or impedance of that component or conductor.
W
WAN wide area network
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing

WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment

WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.
Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all
priority queues can be scheduled.
wireless local area A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
network (WLAN) wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data
interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional
LAN.
wrapping A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-
based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH two-fiber bidirectional multiplex
section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the node that
detects a failure. For details, see ITU-T G.841.
X
X.21 ITU-T standard for serial communications over synchronous digital lines. It is mainly
used in Europe and Japan.
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
XCS cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Y
Y.1731 The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by
IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined
OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI),
Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS),
Maintenance Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor
Specific (VSP) for fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss
measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM).
Z
Z interface extension Extending the analogue subscriber to another place by extending the Z interface.


OSN 3500 V200R015C20 Product Description 02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 3500 V200R015C20 Product Description 02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 3500 V200R015C20

The intended audiences of this document are:

l Network Planning Engineer

DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium

WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Based on Product Version

Updates in Issue 01 (2016-10-31) Based on Product Version

l Added the N1IXCSA, N1HSNS3 boards.

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Updates in Issue 03 (2016-04-29) Based on Product Version

l Optimized section "DCN Management Scheme."

Updates in Issue 02 (2016-01-15) Based on Product Version

l Optimized section "Product Networking."

Updates in Issue 01 (2015-10-31) Based on Product Version

l Added the N2AT6 board in "Boards."

Updates in Issue 02 (2015-07-28) Based on Product Version

l Optimized the sections such as "Boards", and "Board REG Function".

Updates in Issue 01 (2015-04-30) Based on Product Version

l Added the "Product Specifications" and "Synchronization" sections.

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

l Optimized the sections such as "Equipment Level Protection", "Network Level

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

6 Functions and Features in Packet Mode................................................................................. 44

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

6.2.1 Service Description....................................................................................................................................................46

7 Functions and Features in TDM Mode................................................................................... 65

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

9.2.1 Outband DCN.......................................................................................................................................................... 113

11 Security Management............................................................................................................. 124

14 Complied Standards............................................................................................................... 165

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

14.6 EMC Standards.........................................................................................................................................................177

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

1 Product Highlights and Specifications

About This Chapter

1.1 Product Highlights

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Product Highlights

1.1.1 Universal Switch Architecture for Multiservice Grooming

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN equipment architecture

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

1.1.2 Hierarchical OAM Facilitating Fault Detection

Application of Hierarchical OAM

Figure 1-2 Application of hierarchical OAM

CE: Customer Edge MEP: Maintenance End Point

Table 1-1 provides various levels of OAM and their functions.

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Table 1-1 Various levels of OAM and their functions

Ethernet service Ethernet service OAM (CFM) helps maintain end-

MPLS MPLS tunnel/PW MPLS tunnel/PW OAM detects, identifies, and

Issue 02 (2017-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4